Quarterlytics / Industrials / Business Equipment & Supplies / Xerox Holdings Corporation

Xerox Holdings Corporation

xrx · NASDAQ Industrials
Claim this profile
Ticker xrx
Exchange NASDAQ
Sector Industrials
Industry Business Equipment & Supplies
Employees 17600
← All annual reports
FY2003 Annual Report · Xerox Holdings Corporation
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual 

Report 

2003 

Since 2000, we have relentlessly
focused on effective execution
and have consistently delivered
on our commitments. In 2003,
our progress continued.

Our focus now is on growth.

Financial Highlights ($ millions, except EPS)

Equipment Sales

Post Sale, Finance and Other Revenue

Total Revenue

Total Cost and Expense

Net Income

Diluted EPS 

Operating Cash Flows

Cash and Cash Equivalents

Debt

2003 

$ 4,250

11,451

15,701

15,265

360

0.36

1,879

2,477

11,166

2002

$ 3,970

11,879

15,849

15,745

91

0.02

1,980

2,887

14,171

On the cover:
The stylized chart on the front cover 
represents the extraordinary Xerox 
turnaround over the past four years – 
from a net loss of $273 million in 2000
to net income of $360 million in 2003.

Anne M. Mulcahy, 

Chairman and 

Chief Executive Officer

Fellow Shareholders:
It is with enormous pride in

our people that I am able to

report to you that 2003 was

another year of good progress,

excellent execution and 

accelerating marketplace

momentum for Xerox. 

Everywhere you look the signs are positive. Take a look at 
the charts accompanying this letter. We generated near record
amounts of cash from operations, significantly reduced both
debt and cost, maintained gross margins and recapitalized the
company. Even more importantly, we brought to market an
expansive armada of innovative technology and services, gained
market share in key segments of our business, grew equipment
sales by 7 percent and won scores of large customer contracts –
many of them in direct face-offs with our best competitors.
Across the board and around the world, we did what we said
we would do in 2003 – and then some.

Letter to 
Shareholders

01

Strategies and 
Opportunities

08

2003 
Report Card 

16

Financial
Review

17

In many ways, the curtain has closed on the
Xerox turnaround. But we are keenly aware
that most great plays have two acts. As
pleased as we are with our performance the
past few years, we know that it has merely
set the stage for what is to come next – a
period of growth and greatness for Xerox
and for Xerox shareholders. We are already
busy creating that future.

Fortunately, we do not want for opportunity. I spend a lot of
time with our customers – every chance I get. And every time 
I do, I come away bullish on our prospects for growth. Chief
Executive Officers and Chief Information Officers have some
very common and critical problems: the need to reduce 
costs and boost productivity, the desire to get closer to their
existing customers and attract new ones, the need to make
sense of a dizzying array of new technologies, and an almost
desperate desire to optimize their investments in technology
and make sure that technology is working for them and not
against them.

And whenever I hear those customer needs, I know that Xerox
is part of the solution. Let me give you three examples of how
we are helping our customers deal with their most pressing
business problems:
• In more than 200 blue-chip companies, Xerox has done 

rigorous Office Document Assessments to understand docu-
ment workflows. We are saving these customers an average
of 30 percent of their document costs and streamlining their
processes as well.

• In a growing list of marketing companies, our digital printing
solutions are enabling our customers to communicate with
their customers more effectively. We are helping hundreds of
our customers find what up to now has been the elusive Holy
Grail of marketing – the ability to communicate with large
customer bases with one-to-one precision at just the right
time with just the right information, while eliminating the
need to maintain inventories of marketing materials that
quickly become obsolete.

Declining Debt
as of December 31
($ billions)

18.6

16.7

14.2

11.2

2000

2001

2002

2003

2

Equipment Sales
Equipment Sales
($ millions)
($ millions)

5,264
5,264

4,403
4,403

4,250
4,250

3,970
3,970

2000
2000

2001
2001

2002
2002

2003
2003

• In global enterprises around the world, we are helping 
• In global enterprises around the world, we are helping 

our customers maximize their investments in information
our customers maximize their investments in information
technology and helping them make document-intensive 
technology and helping them make document-intensive 
work processes more efficient, more impactful and more 
work processes more efficient, more impactful and more 
user friendly. Companies like Microsoft, Lloyd’s, Sun
user friendly. Companies like Microsoft, Lloyd’s, Sun
Microsystems and Siemens have turned to Xerox for help.
Microsystems and Siemens have turned to Xerox for help.

I could go on, but you get the point. The “copier giant” has
I could go on, but you get the point. The “copier giant” has
transformed itself into a leading technology and services 
transformed itself into a leading technology and services 
company – with an important twist. Too many organizations
company – with an important twist. Too many organizations
focus on the wrong side of information technology – putting
focus on the wrong side of information technology – putting
too much emphasis on the “technology” and not enough 
too much emphasis on the “technology” and not enough 
on the “information.” With smart document management
on the “information.” With smart document management
services, we’re helping our customers focus more on the 
services, we’re helping our customers focus more on the 
information and ideas captured in documents than on the 
information and ideas captured in documents than on the 
technology needed to produce them.
technology needed to produce them.

A case in point is the work we are doing with a major airline. 
A case in point is the work we are doing with a major airline. 
We are helping them manage their documents so that they 
We are helping them manage their documents so that they 
structure their own content, automate their own distribution and
structure their own content, automate their own distribution and
approvals, track sign-off by the right person, retire documents to
approvals, track sign-off by the right person, retire documents to
a central repository, and provide reporting statistics to manage-
a central repository, and provide reporting statistics to manage-
ment. That’s what we mean by smart document management.
ment. That’s what we mean by smart document management.
It’s also smart business. The process reduces the risk of delayed
It’s also smart business. The process reduces the risk of delayed
flight departures and arrivals, practically eliminates the
flight departures and arrivals, practically eliminates the likelihood
likelihood of a bad compliance report by the FAA, and saves
of a bad compliance report by the FAA, and is projected to save
them three-quarters of a million dollars a year.
them three-quarters of a million dollars a year.

We have continued to invest heavily in
We have continued to invest heavily in
research and development and to focus 
research and development and to focus 
that investment on helping our customers
that investment on helping our customers
find better ways to do great work. Even 
find better ways to do great work. Even 
in our darkest days, we never considered
in our darkest days, we never considered
mortgaging our future. What a hollow victory
mortgaging our future. What a hollow victory
it would have been to save the company
it would have been to save the company
from financial failure only to suffer the 
from financial failure only to suffer the 
consequences of a technological drought.
consequences of a technological drought. 

3
3

Stabilized Gross Margins
(Percent)

42.4

42.0

37.4

38.2

Over the last two years, we have brought to market some 
38 new products as well as a rich portfolio of smart document-
related services. These investments are already paying off. 
In fact, more than half of our equipment sale revenue last 
year – and 60 percent in the fourth quarter – came from offer-
ings that were introduced in the past two years.

That pace will only quicken in the years ahead. We not only 
continue to invest heavily, but we’ve also become very smart 
in focusing that investment on solving real problems that real
people have in the real world. Last year we were awarded 
628 patents to place us among a handful of leaders worldwide.
These are not patents for the sake of numbers. One of the 
hallmarks of the new Xerox is a deep desire to be connected 
to the realities of our customers. And we work at it with 
a passion and pervasiveness that no other company in our
industry can match:
• More than 12,000 Xerox managed services employees

currently work on-site in hundreds of customer locations
around the world.

• Our cadre of 350 senior executives have each accepted 

personal responsibility for at least one of our major accounts.

• Our research labs regularly host customers for two-way 

communication exchanges.

• Our product developers and engineers, as they are quick to

tell you, spend more time in the field with our customers than
at any time in our history.

• And, of course, our unsurpassed field sales and service force
of some 25,000 people worldwide are intimately involved
with their clients on a daily basis.

From top to bottom, Xerox people are 
tightly connected to our customers and their
businesses. For us, it’s very personal. Our
customers are not faceless names, but real
people with aspirations and needs and
dreams that we want to help them realize. As
a result, we are focused on three areas where
we can help them be more successful.

2000

2001

2002

2003

4

Improving Selling,  
Administrative and 
General Expenses 
($ millions)

5,518

4,728

4,437

4,249

2000

2001

2002

2003

There is, of course, the $9 billion production market, which
we lead. A strong array of systems and solutions – led by the
Xerox DocuColor® iGen3® Digital Production Press – promises
to dramatically expand the market opportunity for Xerox. 
As you will see elsewhere in this report, our new generation 
of digital technology and services expands our market oppor-
tunity three-fold. We are driving the New Business of Printing™
in areas such as one-to-one marketing and print-on-demand.
Early customer response to our new generation of color
production technology has been very encouraging. By year’s
end, we had installed more than 125 DocuColor iGen3 presses.
Many customers are buying more than one. In fact, our 
leading DocuColor iGen3 partner already has a half-dozen.

Our second opportunity is in the office, a market that is 
huge. Xerox is well established in this market and focused on
segments that are growing the fastest – color, digital multi-
function, and office services and solutions. Last year, we brought
15 new offerings to the office market – color and black-and-
white, printers and copiers, multifunction and services – at price
points that are highly competitive. Our customers approved. 
We participated in more buying decisions than ever before – 
and we’re winning.

Our third opportunity is in the services market, in which we
are making significant inroads. Our customers – particularly
our larger ones – are turning to us for help in designing and
improving work processes that are document intensive. These
include mining customer databases for one-to-one marketing
applications, content management and retrieval, seamless
integration of paper and digital documents and a host of other
applications. Our successful document outsourcing business
gives us a strong base on which to build. 

Three years ago we made a critical strategic decision – to place
our investment bets on market segments that were growing
the fastest, where our customers needed help and where 
we could add value. That meant putting our technology and
innovation muscle and brainpower behind digital production,
the digital office, color and value-added services. Last year, 
70 percent of our revenue came from these areas and revenue
from these segments grew 8 percent.

5

At the same time, we made another strategic bet. We substan-
tially deepened and widened our distribution channels with an
eye to reaching more customers in the way they want while
reducing unnecessary costs to Xerox. Although our direct sales
force is still one of our crown jewels, it is augmented by an
equally effective network of agents, concessionaires, value-
added resellers, retailers and a worldclass TeleWeb operation. 

Xerox now claims the broadest and deepest
set of offerings in our industry and the 
broadest and deepest network of distribution
channels. It’s a winning combination.

If I sound bullish, it’s because I am. We are in the right 
markets with the technology to expand those markets over
time. We have the right offerings that help our customers 
find better ways to do great work. And we have the right 
business model which delivers both operational excellence 
and consistently improving performance.

When I wrote to you last year, I said that one of our key 
priorities was to continue to establish credibility with you and
to earn your trust. That is very important to all of us at Xerox. 
We now have a three-year track record of delivering on 
some very specific commitments. We have an attractive and
predictable business model with a large recurring revenue
stream. And we have strengthened and streamlined business
processes that enable us to better manage our business with
improved efficiencies.

Just as importantly, we have a premium brand in the attractive
and expanding $100 billion document market, a vast distribution
network led by a global sales and service force that the rest 
of our industry only dreams about, worldclass technology and
innovation fueled by leading labs and scientists around the
world, a knowledge and savviness about our customers’ docu-
ment needs that builds on a rich heritage and our passionate
engagement with our customers, a focused strategy of investing
for growth in markets where we can add value – and the
enormous talent of 60,000 people in more than a hundred 
countries who are committed to success. 

Return to Profitability
Net Income (Loss) 
($ millions)

360

91

(94)

(273)

2000

2001

2002

2003

6

As you might expect, the size of our opportunities and the
soundness of our strategies has attracted some very tough com-
petitors. We do not shrink from that challenge. It energizes us.
All of us at Xerox believe our best days are ahead of us. And we
believe just as firmly that the caliber of our competitors and the
demands of our customers will only strengthen our resolve to
execute tomorrow even better than we do today.

Our 2004 plan is for flat revenue with margin and earnings
expansion followed by a return to revenue growth, operating
margin expansion, and continued earnings growth in 2005 
and beyond. 

As the curtain goes up on our second act, 
all the pieces are in place to return Xerox to
growth and greatness. We are confident but
not arrogant, assured but not complacent.
We constantly remind ourselves that the
enemy of great is good. None of us at Xerox
wants to be just good enough. We are on 
a road whose destination is nothing short of
greatness. You should expect no less; we 
aim to deliver no less.

We are keenly aware that you put a lot of faith in us. Earning
your trust energizes us. We believe we have demonstrated 
consistency and credibility over the past three years. And we
are determined to keep earning your trust in 2004 and beyond.

Anne M. Mulcahy
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

March 2004

7

Strategies and Opportunities

Xerox Corporation 

is a $15.7 billion technology and services enterprise that helps businesses deploy

smart document management strategies and find better ways to work. Our 

intent is to constantly lead with innovative technologies, products, solutions 

and services that customers can depend upon to improve business results.

The company’s operations are guided by customer-focused and employee-

centered core values – such as social responsibility, diversity and quality –

augmented by a passion for innovation, speed and adaptability. 

Color Everywhere:

Remember black-and-white television, 

black-and-white computer monitors, black-

and-white cell phone screens? The 

view certainly wasn’t as vibrant as it 
is in today’s much more colorful 
digital world. With Xerox’s industry-
leading color technology for produc-
tion and office markets, those vibrant
images on screens can be printed 
in affordable, high-quality color. Xerox’s

comprehensive portfolio of color 
systems is driving the rapid acceleration 

of color printing in the workplace. 

2003 color revenue grew 17 percent, largely due to
the success of our DocuColor ® series. Color revenue
now represents more than 20 percent of total
revenue. Yet color pages represent less than 
4 percent of the total pages printed on Xerox
technology. The opportunity for color remains huge
– in equipment sales, page volume growth and 
the subsequent flow through to post sale revenue. 

From desktop solid ink and laser color printers 
to color multifunction systems and 100 page-per-
minute digital color presses, with Xerox color 
technology what you see is really what you get.

8

Think about all the ways
documents affect the way we
work and the way businesses
operate. Marketing brochures. Financial 
reports. Purchase orders. Employment
applications. Insurance policies. Health forms.
Report cards. The list goes on and on. In today’s
world, some of these documents exist on paper
but more often they are digital, found on
computer screens, on PDAs, and on Web pages.
That’s where information lives today. That’s
where ideas are born. At Xerox, we offer
unparalleled expertise and technology that free
people to spend more time on creating content
and less time dealing with technology issues. 

It’s not just about finding better 
ways to print and copy, it’s 
about better ways to work. 

We call it 

smart document

management. 

Through the industry’s broadest portfolio of
systems and services, we’re helping our
customers find more efficient ways to manage
work processes, ensure a seamless flow 
between paper and digital environments, share
knowledge, personalize communication and
create documents – whether they’re marks 
on paper or data in a server – that are smart
sources of invaluable information. 

Xerox’s business imperatives are centered on
delivering smart document strategies through 
the production, office and services markets.
Here’s how…

9

Product on:i

t’s a $9 billion market that has the

potential to expand into a $27 billion opportunity as more high-volume print jobs

are produced using dynamic digital technology rather than static and more time-

and labor-intensive offset presses. It’s a market that Xerox created and continues to

lead through breakthrough technology and value-added solutions. It’s all about

driving the New Business of Printing™ – digital, personal, colorful, fast and effective.

Through our production business, Xerox is
delivering smart document management to large
corporations, graphic arts customers, quick 
print centers, and commercial print enterprises.
Our high-volume digital production printers 
and presses, integrated with solutions, enable 
on-demand printing, short-run book publishing,
one-to-one marketing applications and more.

In 2003, Xerox strengthened its 
market share leadership position in:

• Production publishing

• Production printing

• Production color

And grew share in:

• Light production
• Continuous feed

Color Everywhere:

10

Students at Parsons School 
of Design in New York City 
created and produced a colorful,
52-page campus-life magazine 
working with Roger P. Gimbel,
Director of Worldwide Marketing
for Global Document Solutions,
a Xerox commercial printing 
customer who is growing his
business through digital work-
flow tools integrated with 
his Xerox DocuColor® iGen3®
Digital Production Press. Many
iGen3 customers expect that 
this powerful system will help
increase their overall revenue 
by at least 15 percent. 

Xerox has shown a keen ability to identify and address emerging opportunities 

in the commercial print market. It has led with advanced digital color and

monochrome printers and presses that help print providers profitably address 

a range of customer requirements, including book publishing, on-demand 

printing and one-to-one variable data solutions.

Charles Pesko, Managing Director, CAP Ventures

Smart

technology:

Smart

business:

• Digital presses that run at speeds from 

• Impressions produced on digital color 

52 to 850 pages per minute.

• DocuColor production printers including the

DocuColor iGen3, the only digital color press in
the industry that prints 100 full-color 8 1⁄2 x 11-
inch impressions per minute at quality that
rivals traditional offset printing. More than 200
million pages have been printed to date on
iGen3 presses. 

• DocuTech® black-and-white high-speed 

digital presses, including a recently launched 
new DocuTech platform that creates a new 
mid-production market segment and sets
image-quality, productivity, ease-of-use 
and reliability benchmarks.

• Xerox 2101 and 1010 digital light production

printer/copiers, our first entries in this 
growing market.

• Continuous feed printing systems.

• FreeFlow™ software that improves workflow

processes from creation to delivery. 

production printers are expected to grow 
from 14 billion in 2002 to more than 58 billion in
2007, according to CAP Ventures. 

• For Xerox, revenue per color page is more 
than five times greater than revenue per 
black-and-white page.

• According to industry analysts, color and person-
alization significantly increase the response rate
of direct mail. When an individual’s name is
added to a printed page, response rates go up 
44 percent. When a name and color are added,
response rates increase 135 percent. But when
direct mail includes the customer’s name and
customized content that addresses the
customer’s interest and is printed in color, the
response rates increase more than 500 percent.

• Digital production printing enables faster turn-
around of large print jobs and the advantages 
of customized, one-to-one printing. According 
to independent third-party research, by 2005, 
33 percent of all commercial print jobs will be
produced in 24 hours or less. And the market for
customized print applications will grow from
$2.5 billion in 2001 to $6 billion in 2004.

Siemens has shifted the production of its cell phone user guides 
in the global markets to an on-demand model that relies on a smart
document management solution from Xerox. Through a combination of
digital and offset production systems combined with variable information
software and services, Xerox helps Siemens eliminate costly inventory
expenses, achieve global quality standards and optimize processes. 
Real-time delivery is achieved with significant total cost savings.

11

Smart

technology:

In the $57 billion office market, Xerox has nearly
doubled its portfolio of office systems in the last
year. We now boast the industry’s most complete
product line of cost-competitive offerings in 
all segments – full color and black-and-white, 
networked printers, multifunction systems, 
and digital copiers at speeds that range from 
16 to 90 pages per minute.

• WorkCentre® Pro, WorkCentre®, and

CopyCentre® products are scalable systems 
that offer customers what they need, when they
need it at prices that are the most competitive 
in Xerox’s history. With Xerox’s award-winning
multifunction devices, customers manage their
multiple document needs with a single device
that prints, copies, scans, faxes and emails. 

• Color systems including the WorkCentre Pro
32/40 and DocuColor® 3535 printer-copier,
which use chemically grown emulsion aggre-
gation toner – a Xerox science breakthrough that
improves image quality and operating costs
while using less toner and producing less waste. 

• Phaser® black-and-white and color network

printers that rely on single-pass laser and solid
ink color technology, making color printing easy
and more affordable for the office. 

• CentreWare® Web software solution that helps

customers manage all network printing devices,
regardless of brand, through a Web browser.

• FlowPort® software, which bridges the paper

and digital worlds by using a unique encoded 
cover sheet to send scanned documents 
directly to email or other digital destinations.

FO    fice:

one person to global enterprises that

rom businesses run by 

rely on contributions from thousands, 

Xerox systems and services meet 

the needs of offices of any size.  

Our integrated approach to smart

document management in the office

environment responds to our

customers’ critical priorities: improving

productivity, reducing costs and

turning complex work processes into

simple, efficient solutions.  

Xerox has three big things going for them right now: 

The widest array of hardware products in the

marketplace, solutions and services both of their 

own design and partner companies, and distribution 

channels at all levels of the marketplace. Bring them 

all together and Xerox can win the office.

Richard Norton, President, DocuTrends 

12

Smart

business:

• In 2002, about 64 billion pages were printed in
color. Xerox expects that by 2007, office envi-
ronments will print about 159 billion pages 
in color. Like the production business, color
pages can deliver five times the revenue of
black-and-white.

• Xerox’s expanded distribution strategy 

brings the Xerox brand to businesses small 
to large. In addition to the industry’s strongest
direct sales force and thousands of global 
concessionaires, resellers and Xerox sales
agents, our more than 600 global TeleWeb 
representatives expand Xerox’s reach, reduce
selling costs, and touch one-third of all office-
related purchasing decisions.

• Xerox is playing in more office purchasing 
decisions – and winning. We are a leader in 
the office color multifunction market. And last 
year, we gained share in the black-and-white 
digital multifunction market despite the tough
competitive landscape. 

• Solid ink produces 90 percent less waste

than laser printing. It is also up to three times 
faster. Xerox recently introduced a new solid 
ink platform that sets an industry standard 
for performance in the sub-$1,000 color 
printer market. 

Color Everywhere:

Flip through a stack of mail and notice the
pieces that catch your eye. The shimmering
silver dress on the catalog cover, the burning
orange of the sun on a postcard, the bold 
red offer on a promotional flyer. It’s simple:
color cuts through clutter. And more small
companies today are using color – Xerox color
– to make their business stand out in a crowd. 
It’s working for Tricia Hendricks and Roy Hall
of Regency Financial Services, a mortgage
brokerage in Bronx, N.Y. They depend on the

ConAgra Foods, Inc., one of North America’s
largest packaged food companies, markets many of
America’s favorite brands including Banquet, Butterball
and Chef Boyardee. To keep its internal operations
running as smoothly as its diverse marketing initiatives,
ConAgra Foods turned to Xerox for help in streamlining 
its document management infrastructure. Through an
Office Document Assessment, Xerox identified cost savings
opportunities to consolidate certain printing and copying
functions, encourage use of scanning capabilities, and
more effectively manage document management assets
including equipment, supplies and service contracts.
ConAgra Foods is now replacing dozens of standalone
copiers and printers with Xerox networked 
multifunction devices that print, copy, 
scan, and fax. It’s a recipe for productivity
with Xerox as the key ingredient.

affordability, reliability and ease of use 
of the Xerox Phaser 8200 solid ink color
printer to produce full-color direct mail
advertising. With our expanding network 
of resellers, concessionaires, and sales
agents, Xerox is reaching more and more
small- and medium-size businesses, 
helping them see green through the allure
of Xerox color.   

13

Construction

Servi     es:C McGraw-Hill

and go. At Xerox, we never take competition for granted.

ompetitors come

But, we also know what gives us the competitive edge

“It’s not easy to take
millions of documents,
scan them, keep them 
all together, index them
for keyword searches 
then transmit them to
different locations 
and different databases 
at the same time for
repurposing onto different
media. Xerox showed 
us that they had really
mastered this technology.”

and what differentiates Xerox from the other players in

the industry. Quite simply: it’s our people and our

know-how.

Combined, it’s a powerful, unrivalled force of deep

knowledge on how to simplify and streamline docu-

ment-intensive business processes. No one knows

the nuances of document management better than

Xerox. No one knows how to make document devices

perform more intuitively, more efficiently than Xerox.

Xerox Global Services is all about savvy people

sharing their knowledge to help our customers

deliver better business results.

14

These words from Mark Kent,
vice president of content for
McGraw-Hill Construction, sum
up the challenge McGraw-Hill
faced and the effectiveness of our
solution. Xerox worked with
McGraw-Hill to consolidate its
five regional scanning centers,
which hosted more than 30
million pages of information for
60,000 active construction sites,
into Xerox’s centralized imaging
center in Hot Springs, Ark. The
outsourcing partnership delivers
savings of 20 percent to McGraw-
Hill, shortens turnaround time for
accessing documentation and
increases customer service levels.
Massive amounts of information
available at a moment’s notice.
Smart documents at work.

Smart

offerings:

Smart

business:

Based on our leadership position with large enter-
prises and a solid $3 billion Managed Document
Service business, we provide consulting, imaging,
content management and outsourcing services
that help our customers reduce costs through
processes that deliver the right information, in the
right form, at the right time.

Personalized Communication Services:
To cut through the clutter of information overload,
more businesses are relying on Xerox systems
and services to create personalized documents
(like brochures, enrollment kits, catalogs) that are
printed on demand, when our customer needs 
it with the individualized information that piques
their customers’ interest. 

Product Lifecycle Services: 
Products and services are more complex than
ever. And so are the documents that support
them. Xerox creates seamless workflow
processes that reduce the need to produce and
store large volumes, enhance the effectiveness
of documentation and drive faster product 
delivery times. 

Document, Content and Imaging Services:
People are more productive when the documents
they need are easy to find and easy to share.
Xerox helps streamline operations by converting
traditional, document-intensive business process-
es into searchable digital files. Xerox’s imaging
services include scanning, retrieving, archiving,
and hosting massive digital repositories – every-
thing from insurance forms and employment
applications to historical photos and blueprints.

Office and Production Services: 
Xerox helps customers simplify work and improve
productivity by eliminating hidden costs in tech-
nology-laden infrastructures. We assess our cus-
tomers’ current operations from small businesses
to large commercial print shops, design new work
processes using existing equipment, and even
provide day-to-day management of document
systems, supplies and service.

• People in offices produce 7.5 billion documents
a year. Industry analyst IDC estimates that exec-
utives spend 45 percent of their time working
with documents. And research indicates that
typical organizations spend between 5 and 15
percent of their revenue on documents. Xerox
is embracing this massive opportunity to re-
engineer often ignored work processes that are
costing companies time and money. 

• In the $16 billion document services market,
Xerox holds the No. 1 worldwide market 
position with large enterprises.

• Experts estimate that most corporations spend

between $5,000-$10,000 per employee per
year to support IT infrastructure. Xerox’s Office
Document Assessments identify, on average,
savings of about 30 percent for clients’ docu-
ment costs. Office Document Assessments – 
a Six Sigma-based consulting tool – evaluate 
a company’s entire document environment 
to identify areas where operating costs can 
be reduced, processes simplified and produc-
tivity improved.

The Xerox relationship has allowed us to launch 

an even more powerful series of connected databases 

and get even more connected to our customers – 

the architects, engineers, contractors, and building 

product manufacturers who rely on our information 

around the clock to do their jobs more effectively.

Norbert Young, President, McGraw-Hill Construction 

15

We Deliver on Commitments
2003 Report Card

Commitments

Maintain minimum 
cash balance of $1 billion

Results

$2.5 billion

Year-end debt below $12 billion

$11.2 billion

Low single-digit equipment 
sales growth

7% growth

Modest total revenue declines

1% decline

Gross margin remains in 
the 40% – 41% range

42%

SAG as a % of revenue improves
about 2 percentage points

0.9 point improvement

Expect earnings of 
$0.50 – $0.55

Reported $0.36 
Pro-Forma* $0.58

* In an effort to provide investors with additional and more 

useful information regarding Xerox’s results as determined by
generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), the company
is disclosing this non-GAAP earnings measure. The pro-forma
measure excludes the effects of the charges recorded for the
Berger litigation and the write-off of the unamortized 2002 debt
issue costs in order to provide consistency in display with the
2003 full year earnings guidance provided to investors in
November 2002. These 2003 unanticipated charges were not
contemplated when the guidance was provided. In addition, the
pro-forma measure provides a consistent basis in evaluating
Xerox’s 2004 earnings projections. We believe that meaningful
analysis of our financial performance requires an understanding
of the underlying factors and trends in that performance. In

16

some cases, large factors or events, such as those that occurred
in 2003, distort operational long-term trends. For this reason,
we believe that investors would find a pro-forma earnings
measure, which excludes the effects of the Berger litigation and
write-off of debt issue costs, more useful. Reconciliation to the
related GAAP measure is included below.

Reconciliation of Non-GAAP measure Per/Share
$ 0.36
Earnings
$ 0.17 ($146 million after-tax)
Berger Litigation Provision
$ 0.05 ($45 million after-tax)
Write-off of debt issue costs
$ 0.58
Pro-forma earnings

Financial 
Review

18 Management’s Discussion and 

Analysis of Results of

Operations and Financial

Condition

38 Audited Consolidated Financial

Statements

38

Consolidated Statements of

Income 

39

40

Consolidated Balance Sheets

Consolidated Statements of

Cash Flows

41

Consolidated Statements of 

Common Shareholders’ Equity

42 Notes to the Consolidated

Financial Statements

Report of Management

Report of Independent Auditors

91

91

92 Quarterly Results of Operations

93

Five Years in Review

94 Officers

95 Directors

96

Social Responsibility

17

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of 
Results of Operations and Financial Condition 

Throughout this document, references to “we,” 
“our” or “us” refer to Xerox Corporation and its sub-
sidiaries. References to “Xerox Corporation” refer to
the stand-alone parent company and do not include 
its subsidiaries.

Executive Overview:

We are a technology and services enterprise and a
leader in the global document market, developing,
manufacturing, marketing, servicing and financing the
industry’s broadest portfolio of document equipment,
solutions and services. Our industry is undergoing a
fundamental transformation from older technology
light lens devices to digital systems, the transition
from black and white to color, as well as an increased
reliance on electronic documents. While in the near
term we are experiencing certain revenue declines
related to the proportion of our total revenues attribut-
able to light lens products, we believe that, as a whole,
these trends play to our strengths and represent
opportunities for future growth since our research 
and development investments have been focused on
digital and color offerings.

We operate in competitive markets and our cus-
tomers demand improved solutions, such as the abili-
ty to print offset quality color documents on demand;
improved product functionality, such as the ability to
print, copy, fax and scan from a single device; and
lower prices for the same functionality. We deliver
advanced technology through focused investment in
research and development and offset lower prices
through continuous improvement of our cost base.
Our revenue is heavily dependent on the amount of
equipment installed at customer locations and the uti-
lization of those devices. As such, our critical success
factors include hardware installation and equipment
sales growth to stabilize and grow our installed base
of equipment at customer locations. In addition to our
installed base, the key factors in delivering growth in
our recurring revenue streams (supplies, service,
paper, outsourcing and rental, which we collectively
refer to as post sale revenue) are page volume growth
and higher revenue per page. Connected multifunc-
tion devices and new services and solutions are key
drivers to increase equipment usage. The transition to
color is the primary driver to improve revenue per
page, as color documents typically require significantly
more toner coverage per page than traditional black
and white printing. Revenue per color page is approxi-
mately five times higher than revenue per black and
white page.

18

Financial Overview:

In 2003, we continued to build on our 2002 momentum
as evidenced by product installation and equipment
sales growth, earnings growth and an improvement 
in our overall financial condition and liquidity. In a 
relatively weak economic environment, we continued
our transition toward revenue growth and further
improved our business model. Our focused invest-
ment in the growing areas of digital production and
office systems yielded 21 new products. The success
of these products, combined with the 17 products
introduced in 2002, enabled us to gain market share in
key segments and deliver year-over-year equipment
sales growth in each quarter. These improved trends,
combined with favorable currency translation, helped
moderate the decline in total revenue.

We maintained our focus on cost management

throughout 2003. Gross margins remained strong as
we continued to offset price investments with produc-
tivity improvements. We further reduced selling, admin-
istrative and general (SAG) expenses and continued to
invest in research and development, prioritizing our
investments in the faster growing areas of the market.

Our 2003 balance sheet strategy focused on reduc-

ing total debt, extending debt maturities, improving
operating cash flows, maintaining long-term financing
agreements supporting our secured borrowing strate-
gy and maintaining a cash balance of at least $1 bil-
lion. In 2003, we significantly improved our liquidity
by completing a $3.6 billion Recapitalization, which
included public offerings of common stock, 3-year
mandatory convertible preferred stock and 7-year 
and 10-year senior unsecured notes, as well as our
new $1 billion 2003 Credit Facility. In 2003, we also
improved our liquidity by expanding our secured bor-
rowing programs beyond our primary $5 billion U.S.
agreement with General Electric Capital Corporation
to also include long-term arrangements in Canada, the
U.K. and France. Proceeds from the Recapitalization,
secured borrowing programs, and $1.9 billion of cash
generated from operations enabled us to reduce total
debt by $3 billion in 2003, extend $1.6 billion of debt
maturities and end the year with a cash balance of
$2.5 billion. We continue to focus on strengthening
our balance sheet to further enhance our operating
and financial flexibility.

Revenues for the three-year period ended

December 31, 2003 were as follows:

$  6,970

$  6,752

$  7,443

Net income (loss) and diluted earnings (loss) per

($ in millions)

Equipment sales
Post sale and other revenue
Finance income
Total revenues
Total color revenue included in total revenues

A reconciliation of the above presentation of rev-

enues to the revenue classifications included in our
Consolidated Statements of Income is as follows:

($ in millions)

Sales
Less: Supplies, paper and 

other sales

Equipment Sales

Year Ended December 31,
2001
2002
2003

(2,720)

(2,782)

(3,040)

$  4,250

$  3,970

$  4,403

Service, outsourcing and rentals
Add: Supplies, paper and 

$  7,734

$  8,097

$  8,436

other sales

2,720

2,782

3,040

Post sale and other revenue

$10,454

$10,879

$11,476

Total 2003 revenues of $15.7 billion declined one
percent from 2002, reflecting moderating year-over-
year revenue declines, as well as a 5-percentage point
benefit from currency. Equipment sales increased 
7 percent in 2003, reflecting a 6-percentage point ben-
efit from currency, as well as the success of our
numerous color multifunction and production color
products and growth in our Developing Markets
Operations (DMO) segment. 2003 Post sale and other
revenue declined 4 percent from 2002, primarily due
to declines in older technology light lens revenues,
DMO and the Small Office/Home Office (SOHO) busi-
ness which we exited in the second half of 2001. These
declines were partially offset by growth in our digital
revenues and a 5-percentage point benefit from cur-
rency. Post sale and other revenue declines reflect the
reduction in our equipment at customer locations and
related page volume declines. As our equipment sales
continue to increase, we expect that the effects of
post-sale declines will moderate and ultimately
reverse over time. 2003 Finance income, which was
primarily impacted by the volume of equipment lease
originations, approximated that of 2002, including a 
5-percentage point benefit from currency.

Total 2002 revenues of $15.8 billion declined 
7 percent from 2001, including a one-percentage point
benefit from currency. Economic weakness and com-
petitive pressures were only partially offset by the 
success of several new color and monochrome multi-
function products, most of which were launched in the
second half of the year. As a result, equipment sales
declined 10 percent from 2001. 2002 Post sale and
other revenue declined 5 percent from 2001 primarily
due to declines in older technology light lens, DMO
and SOHO. These declines were only partially offset

Year Ended December 31,
2002

2001

2003

$  4,250
10,454
997
$15,701
$ 3,267

$  3,970
10,879
1,000
$15,849
$  2,781

$  4,403
11,476
1,129
$17,008
$  2,759

Percent Change
2002

2003

7%
(4)%
–
(1)%
17%

(10)%
(5)%
(11)%
(7)%
1%

by growth in our digital revenues, driven by increased
usage of color products and monochrome multifunc-
tion systems. 2002 Finance income declined 11 per-
cent from 2001, resulting from lower equipment
installations and our exit from the financing business
in certain European countries.

share for the three years ended December 31, 2003
were as follows:

($ in millions, except share amounts) 2003

Year Ended December 31,
2001
2002

Net income (loss)
Preferred stock dividends

Income (loss) available to 
common shareholders

Diluted earnings (loss) per share

$ 360
(71)

$   91
(73)

$  (94)
(12)

$ 289

$0.36

$   18

$0.02

$ (106)

$(0.15)

2003 Net income of $360 million, or 36 cents per

diluted share, included after-tax impairment and
restructuring charges of $111 million ($176 million
pre-tax), an after-tax charge of $146 million ($239 mil-
lion pre-tax) related to the court approved settlement
of the Berger v. RIGP litigation, a $45 million after-tax
($73 million pre-tax) loss on early extinguishment of
debt and income tax benefits of $35 million from the
reversal of deferred tax asset valuation allowances.

2002 Net income of $91 million, or 2 cents per
diluted share, included after-tax asset impairment and
restructuring charges of $471 million ($670 million
pre-tax), a pre-tax and after-tax charge of $63 million
for impaired goodwill and an after-tax charge of 
$72 million ($106 million pre-tax) for permanently
impaired internal-use capitalized software, partially
offset by $105 million of tax benefits arising from the
favorable resolution of a foreign tax audit and tax law
changes, as well as a favorable adjustment to com-
pensation expense of $31 million ($33 million pre-tax),
that was previously accrued in 2001, associated with
the reinstatement of dividends for our Employee Stock
Ownership Plan (“ESOP”).

The 2001 net loss of $94 million, or 15 cents per

diluted share, included $507 million of after-tax
charges ($715 million pre-tax) for restructuring and
asset impairments associated with our Turnaround
Program including our disengagement from our
worldwide SOHO business. 2001 results also included
a $304 million after-tax gain ($773 million pre-tax)
from the sale of half of our interest in Fuji Xerox, a 
$38 million after-tax gain ($63 million pre-tax) related

19

to the early retirement of debt, $21 million of after-tax
gains ($29 million pre-tax) associated with unhedged
foreign currency, partially offset by $31 million 
($33 million pre-tax) of increased compensation
expense associated with the suspension of dividends
for our ESOP and after-tax goodwill amortization of
$59 million ($63 million pre-tax).

Application of Critical 
Accounting Policies:

In preparing our Consolidated Financial Statements
and accounting for the underlying transactions and
balances, we apply accounting policies that are
described in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial
Statements. We consider the policies discussed below
as critical to understanding our Consolidated Financial
Statements, as their application places the most signif-
icant demands on management’s judgment, since
financial reporting results rely on estimates of the
effects of matters that are inherently uncertain.
Specific risks associated with these critical accounting
policies are described in the following paragraphs.
The impacts and significant risks associated with these
policies on our business operations are discussed
throughout this MD&A where such policies affect our
reported and expected financial results. For a detailed
discussion of the application of these and other
accounting policies, see Note 1 to the Consolidated
Financial Statements.

Senior management has discussed the develop-
ment and selection of the critical accounting policies,
estimates and related disclosures, included herein,
with the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors.
Preparation of this annual report requires us to make
estimates and assumptions that affect the reported
amount of assets and liabilities, disclosure of contin-
gent assets and liabilities as of the date of our financial
statements and the reported amounts of revenue and
expenses during the reporting period. Although actual
results may differ from those estimates, we believe
the estimates are reasonable and appropriate. In
instances where different estimates could reasonably
have been used in the current period, we have dis-
closed the impact on our operations of these different
estimates. In certain instances, for instance with
respect to revenue recognition for leases, because the
accounting rules are prescriptive, it would not have
been possible to have reasonably used different esti-
mates in the current period and sensitivity information
would therefore not be appropriate. Changes in
assumptions and estimates are reflected in the period
in which they occur. The impact of such changes could
be material to our results of operations and financial
condition in any quarterly or annual period.

20

Revenue Recognition Under Bundled Arrangements:
As discussed more fully in Note 1 to the Consolidated
Financial Statements, we sell most of our products
and services under bundled contract arrangements,
which typically include equipment, service, supplies
and financing components for which the customer
pays a single negotiated price for all elements. These
arrangements typically also include a variable compo-
nent for page volumes in excess of contractual mini-
mums, which are often expressed in terms of price per
page, which we refer to as the “cost per copy.” In a
typical bundled arrangement, our customer is quoted
a fixed minimum monthly payment for 1) the equip-
ment, 2) the associated services and other executory
costs, 3) the financing element and 4) frequently sup-
plies. When separate prices are listed in multiple ele-
ment customer contracts, such prices may not be
representative of the fair values of those elements,
because the prices of the different components of the
arrangement may be modified through customer
negotiations, although the aggregate consideration
may remain the same. Revenues under these arrange-
ments are allocated based upon the estimated relative
fair values of each element. Our revenue allocation to
the lease deliverables begins by allocating revenues to
the maintenance and executory costs plus profit there-
on. The remaining amounts are allocated to the equip-
ment and financing elements. We perform extensive
analyses of available verifiable objective evidence of
equipment fair value based on cash selling prices dur-
ing the applicable period. The cash selling prices are
compared to the range of values included in our lease
accounting systems. The range of cash selling prices
must be reasonably consistent with the lease selling
prices, taking into account residual values that accrue
to our benefit, in order for us to determine that such
lease prices are indicative of fair value. Our pricing
interest rates, which are used in determining customer
payments, are developed based upon a variety of fac-
tors including local prevailing rates in the marketplace
and the customer’s credit history, industry and credit
class. Effective January 1, 2004, the pricing rates will
be reassessed quarterly based on changes in local pre-
vailing rates in the marketplace and will be adjusted to
the extent such rates vary by twenty-five basis points
or more, cumulatively, from the last rate in effect. The
pricing interest rates generally equal the implicit rates
within the leases, as corroborated by our comparisons
of cash to lease selling prices.

Revenue Recognition for Leases: As more fully 
discussed in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements, our accounting for leases involves specif-
ic determinations under applicable lease accounting
standards which often involve complex and prescrip-
tive provisions. These provisions affect the timing of
revenue recognition for our equipment. If the leases
qualify as sales-type capital leases, equipment revenue

is recognized upon delivery or installation of the
equipment as sale revenue as opposed to ratably over
the lease term. The critical elements that we consider
with respect to our lease accounting are the determi-
nation of the economic life and the fair value of equip-
ment, including the residual value. Those elements
are based upon historical experience with all our prod-
ucts. For purposes of determining the economic life,
we consider the most objective measure of historical
experience to be the original contract term, since most
equipment is returned by lessees at or near the end of
the contracted term. The economic life of most of our
products is five years since this represents the most
frequent contractual lease term for our principal prod-
ucts and only a small percentage of our leases are for
original terms longer than five years and there is gen-
erally no significant after-market for our used equip-
ment. We believe five years is representative of the
period during which the equipment is expected to be
economically usable, with normal service, for the pur-
pose for which it is intended. Residual values are
established at lease inception using estimates of fair
value at the end of the lease term and are established
with due consideration to forecasted supply and
demand for our various products, product retirement
and future product launch plans, end of lease cus-
tomer behavior, remanufacturing strategies, used
equipment markets, if any, competition and techno-
logical changes.

Accounts and Finance Receivables Allowance for
Doubtful Accounts and Credit Losses: We perform
ongoing credit evaluations of our customers and
adjust credit limits based upon customer payment his-
tory and current creditworthiness. We continuously
monitor collections and payments from our customers
and maintain a provision for estimated credit losses
based upon our historical experience and any specific
customer collection issues that have been identified.
While such credit losses have historically been within
our expectations and the provisions established, we
cannot guarantee that we will continue to experience
credit loss rates similar to those we have experienced
in the past. Measurement of such losses requires con-
sideration of historical loss experience, including the
need to adjust for current conditions, and judgments
about the probable effects of relevant observable data,
including present economic conditions such as delin-
quency rates and financial health of specific customers.
We recorded $224 million, $353 million, and $506 mil-
lion in the Consolidated Statements of Income for pro-
visions for doubtful accounts for both our accounts
and finance receivables for the years ended December
31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively, of which $224
million, $332 million, and $438 million were included
in selling, administrative and general expenses for
such years, respectively. The declining trend in our
provision for doubtful accounts is primarily due to

improved customer administration, collection practices
and credit approval policies, as well as our revenue
declines.

As discussed above, in preparing our Consolidated

Financial Statements for the three years ended
December 31, 2003, we estimated our provision for
doubtful accounts based on historical experience and
customer-specific collection issues. We believe this
methodology is appropriate. During the five year period
ended December 31, 2003, our allowance for doubtful
accounts ranged from approximately 3.4 to 5.5 percent
of gross receivables. Holding all other assumptions
constant, a one percentage point increase or decrease
in the allowance from the December 31, 2003 rate 
of 4.6 percent would change the 2003 provision of 
$224 million by approximately $115 million.

Historically, about half of the provision for doubtful

accounts relates to our finance receivables portfolio.
This provision is inherently more difficult to estimate
than the provision for trade accounts receivable
because the underlying lease portfolio has an average
maturity, at any time, of approximately two to three
years and contains past due billed amounts, as well as
unbilled amounts. The estimated credit quality of any
given customer and class of customer or geographic
location can significantly change during the life of the
portfolio. We consider all available information in our
quarterly assessments of the adequacy of the provi-
sion for doubtful accounts.

Provisions for Excess and Obsolete Inventory Losses:
We value our inventories at the lower of average cost
or market. Inventories also include equipment that is
returned at the end of the lease term. Returned equip-
ment is recorded at the lower of remaining net book
value or salvage value. Salvage value consists of the
estimated market value (generally determined based
on replacement cost) of the salvageable component
parts, which are expected to be used in the remanu-
facturing process. We regularly review inventory
quantities, including equipment to be leased to cus-
tomers, which is included as part of finished goods
inventory, and record a provision for excess and/or
obsolete inventory based primarily on our estimated
forecast of product demand and production require-
ments. Several factors may influence the realizability
of our inventories, including our decision to exit a
product line, technological changes and new product
development. These factors could result in an increase
in the amount of excess or obsolete inventory quan-
tities. Additionally, our estimates of future product
demand may prove to be inaccurate, in which case we
may have understated or overstated the provision
required for excess and obsolete inventories.
Although we make every effort to ensure the accuracy
of our forecasts of future product demand, including
the impact of future product launches and changes in
remanufacturing strategies, significant unanticipated

21

changes in demand or technological developments
could materially impact the value of our inventory and
our reported operating results if our estimates prove
to be inaccurate. We recorded $78 million, $115 mil-
lion, and $242 million in inventory write-down charges
for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001,
respectively. The decline in inventory write-down
charges is due to the absence of business exiting activ-
ities, stabilization of our product lines, manufacturing
outsourcing related improvements and a lower level 
of inventories.

As discussed above, in preparing our financial
statements for the three years ended December 31,
2003, we estimated our provision for excess and obso-
lete inventories based primarily on forecasts of pro-
duction and service requirements. We believe this
methodology is appropriate. During the three year
period ended December 31, 2003, inventory reserves
for net realizable value adjustments as a percentage of
gross inventory varied by approximately one percent-
age point. Holding all other assumptions constant, a
0.5 percentage point increase or decrease in our net
realizable value adjustments would change the 2003
provision of $78 million by approximately $7 million.

Asset Valuations and Review for Potential
Impairments: Our long-lived assets, excluding good-
will, are assessed for impairment by comparison of
the total amount of undiscounted cash flows expected
to be generated by such assets to their carrying value.
We periodically review our long-lived assets, whereby
we make assumptions regarding the valuation and the
changes in circumstances that would affect the carry-
ing value of these assets. If such analysis indicates
that an impairment exists, we are then required to
estimate the fair value of the asset and, as appropriate,
expense all or a portion of the asset, based on a com-
parison to the net book value of such asset or group of
assets. The determination of fair value includes inher-
ent uncertainties, such as the impact of competition
on future value. Our primary methodology for deter-
mining fair value is based on a discounted cash flow
model. We believe that we have made reasonable esti-
mates and judgments in determining whether our
long-lived assets have been impaired; however, if
there is a material change in the assumptions used in
our determination of fair values or if there is a material
change in economic conditions or circumstances influ-
encing fair value, we could be required to recognize
certain impairment charges in the future. During 2002,
due to our decision to abandon the use of certain soft-
ware applications, we recorded an impairment charge
of $106 million in Selling, administrative and general
expenses in the accompanying Consolidated
Statement of Income. In addition, we recorded asset
impairment charges in connection with our restructur-
ing actions of $1 million, $55 million, and $205 million
in 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively.

22

Goodwill and Other Acquired Intangible Assets: We
have made acquisitions in the past that included the
recognition of a significant amount of goodwill and
other intangible assets. Commencing January 1, 2002,
goodwill is no longer amortized, but instead is
assessed for impairment annually or more frequently
as triggering events occur that indicate a decline in fair
value below that of its carrying value. In making these
assessments, we rely on a number of factors including
operating results, business plans, economic projec-
tions, anticipated future cash flows and market compa-
rable data. There are inherent uncertainties related to
these factors and our judgment, including the risk that
the carrying value of our goodwill may be overstated
or understated. In 2002, we recognized an impairment
charge of $63 million related to the goodwill in our
DMO segment, which was recorded as a cumulative
effect of a change in accounting principle in the accom-
panying Consolidated Statements of Income.

Pension and Post-retirement Benefit Plan
Assumptions: We sponsor pension plans in various
forms in several countries covering substantially all
employees who meet eligibility requirements. Post-
retirement benefit plans cover primarily U.S. employ-
ees for retirement medical costs. Several statistical
and other factors that attempt to anticipate future
events are used in calculating the expense, liability
and asset values related to our pension and post-
retirement benefit plans. These factors include
assumptions we make about the discount rate, expect-
ed return on plan assets, rate of increase in healthcare
costs, the rate of future compensation increases and
mortality, among others. For purposes of determining
the expected return on plan assets, we utilize a calcu-
lated value approach in determining the value of the
pension plan assets, as opposed to a fair market value
approach. The primary difference between the two
methods relates to a systematic recognition of
changes in fair value over time (generally two years)
versus immediate recognition of changes in fair value.
Our expected rate of return on plan assets is then
applied to the calculated asset value to determine the
amount of the expected return on plan assets to be
used in the determination of the net periodic pension
cost. The calculated value approach reduces the
volatility in net periodic pension cost that results from
using the fair market value approach. The difference
between the actual return on plan assets and the
expected return on plan assets is added to, or sub-
tracted from, any cumulative differences that arose in
prior years. This amount is a component of the unrec-
ognized net actuarial (gain) loss and is subject to
amortization to net periodic pension cost over the
average remaining service lives of the employees par-
ticipating in the pension plan.

As a result of cumulative asset returns being lower
than expected asset returns over the last several years

and declining interest rates, 2004 net periodic pension
cost will increase. The total unrecognized actuarial
loss as of December 31, 2003 was $1.87 billion, as
compared to $1.84 billion at December 31, 2002. The
change from December 31, 2002 relates to a decline in
the discount rate, offset by improved asset returns as
compared to expected returns. The total unrecognized
actuarial loss will be amortized in the future, subject to
offsetting gains or losses that will change the future
amortization amount. We have recently utilized a
weighted average expected rate of return on plan
assets of 8.3 percent for 2003 expense, 8.8 percent for
2002 expense and 8.9 percent for 2001 expense, on a
worldwide basis. In estimating this rate, we consid-
ered the historical returns earned by the plan assets,
the rates of return expected in the future and our
investment strategy and asset mix with respect to the
plans’ funds. The weighted average rate we will utilize
to calculate our 2004 expense will be 8.1 percent.
Another significant assumption affecting our pension
and post-retirement benefit obligations and the net
periodic pension and other post-retirement benefit
cost is the rate that we use to discount our future
anticipated benefit obligations. In estimating this rate,
we consider rates of return on high quality fixed-
income investments over the period to expected pay-
ment of the pension and other benefits. The weighted
average rate we will utilize to measure our pension
obligation as of December 31, 2003 and calculate our
2004 expense will be 5.8 percent, which is a decrease
from 6.2 percent used in the determination of our pen-
sion obligations in 2003. As a result of the reduction in
the discount rate, the lower cumulative actual return
on plan assets during the prior three years and certain
other factors, our 2004 net periodic pension cost is
expected to be $65 million higher than 2003.

On a consolidated basis, we recognized net peri-

odic pension cost of $364 million, $168 million, and
$99 million for the years ended December 31, 2003,
2002 and 2001, respectively. Pension cost is included
in several income statement components based on
the related underlying employee costs. Pension and
post-retirement benefit plan assumptions are included
in Note 12 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Holding all other assumptions constant, a 0.25 percent
increase or decrease in the discount rate from the
2004 projected rate of 5.8 percent would change the
2004 projected net periodic pension cost by approxi-
mately $23 million. Likewise, a 0.25 percent increase
or decrease in the expected return on plan assets from
the 2004 projected rate of 8.1 percent would change
the 2004 projected net periodic pension cost by
approximately $9 million.

Income Taxes and Tax Valuation Allowances: We
record the estimated future tax effects of temporary
differences between the tax bases of assets and liabili-
ties and amounts reported in our Consolidated

Balance Sheets, as well as operating loss and tax cred-
it carryforwards. We follow very specific and detailed
guidelines in each tax jurisdiction regarding the recov-
erability of any tax assets recorded in our
Consolidated Balance Sheets and provide necessary
valuation allowances as required. We regularly review
our deferred tax assets for recoverability considering
historical profitability, projected future taxable income,
the expected timing of the reversals of existing tempo-
rary differences and tax planning strategies. If we con-
tinue to operate at a loss in certain jurisdictions or are
unable to generate sufficient future taxable income, or
if there is a material change in the actual effective tax
rates or time period within which the underlying tem-
porary differences become taxable or deductible, we
could be required to increase the valuation allowance
against all or a significant portion of our deferred tax
assets, resulting in a substantial increase in our effec-
tive tax rate and a material adverse impact on our
operating results. Conversely, if and when our opera-
tions in some jurisdictions were to become sufficiently
profitable to recover previously reserved deferred tax
assets, we would reduce all or a portion of the applica-
ble valuation allowance in the period when such deter-
mination is made. This would result in an increase to
reported earnings in such period. Adjustments to our
valuation allowance, through charges (credits) to
expense, were $(16) million, $15 million, and $247 mil-
lion for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and
2001, respectively.

We are subject to ongoing tax examinations and
assessments in various jurisdictions. Accordingly, we
incur additional tax expense based upon the probable
outcomes of such matters. In addition, when applica-
ble, we adjust the previously recorded tax expense to
reflect examination results. Our ongoing assessments
of the probable outcomes of the examinations and
related tax positions require judgment and can materi-
ally increase or decrease our effective tax rate as well
as impact our operating results.

Legal Contingencies: We are a defendant in numerous
litigation and regulatory matters including those
involving securities law, patent law, environmental
law, employment law and ERISA, as discussed in Note
15 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. We
determine whether an estimated loss from a contin-
gency should be accrued by assessing whether a loss
is deemed probable and can be reasonably estimated.
We assess potential liability by analyzing our litigation
and regulatory matters using available information.
We develop our views on estimated losses in consul-
tation with outside counsel handling our defense in
these matters, which involves an analysis of potential
results, assuming a combination of litigation and set-
tlement strategies. Should developments in any of
these matters cause a change in our determination as
to an unfavorable outcome and result in the need to

23

recognize a material accrual, or should any of these
matters result in a final adverse judgment or be settled
for significant amounts, they could have a material
adverse effect on our results of operations, cash flows
and financial position in the period or periods in which
such change in determination, judgment or settlement
occurs. In 2003, we recorded a charge of $239 million
reflecting the court approved settlement of the Berger
pension related litigation.

Summary of Results:

Our reportable segments are consistent with how we
manage the business and view the markets we serve.
Our reportable segments are Production, Office, DMO
and Other. Our offerings include hardware, services,
solutions and consumable supplies. The Production
segment includes black and white products which oper-
ate at speeds over 90 pages per minute and color prod-
ucts over 40 pages per minute. Products include the
DocuTech, DocuPrint, Xerox 1010 and Xerox 2101 and
DocuColor families, as well as older technology light-
lens products. The Office segment includes black and
white products which operate at speeds up to 90 pages
per minute and color devices which operate at speeds
up to 40 pages per minute. Products include our family
of Document Centre digital multifunction products
which were expanded to include our new suite of

CopyCentre, WorkCentre, and WorkCentre Pro digital
multifunction systems, DocuColor multifunction prod-
ucts, color laser, solid ink and monochrome laser desk-
top printers, digital and light-lens copiers and facsimile
products. The DMO segment includes our operations in
Latin America, the Middle East, India, Eurasia, Russia
and Africa. This segment includes sales of products that
are typical to the Production and Office segments; how-
ever, management serves and evaluates these markets
on an aggregate geographic basis, rather than on a
product basis. The segment classified as Other, includes
several units, none of which met the thresholds for sep-
arate segment reporting. This group includes Xerox
Supplies Group (predominantly paper), SOHO, Xerox
Engineering Systems (“XES”), Xerox Technology
Enterprises and consulting services, royalty and license
revenues. Other segment profit (loss) includes the oper-
ating results from these entities, other less significant
businesses, our equity income from Fuji Xerox, and 
certain costs which have not been allocated to the
Production, Office and DMO segments including non-
financing interest and other corporate costs.

Revenues:

Revenues by segment for the years ended 2003, 2002
and 2001 were as follows:

(in millions)

2003

Equipment sales
Post sale and other revenue
Finance income

Total Revenue

2002

Equipment sales
Post sale and other revenue
Finance income

Total Revenue

2001

Equipment sales
Post sale and other revenue
Finance income

Total Revenue

Equipment Sales:

2003 Equipment sales of $4.3 billion increased 7 per-
cent from 2002, reflecting significant growth in DMO,
the success of numerous new product introductions
and a 6-percentage point benefit from currency. In
2003, approximately 50 percent of equipment sales
were generated from products launched in the previ-
ous two years. Color equipment sales represented 
28 percent of total equipment sales compared with 
24 percent in 2002. 2002 equipment sales of $4.0 bil-
lion declined 10 percent from 2001, including a one

24

Production

Office

DMO

Other

Total

$1,201
2,970
376

$4,547

$1,100
3,028
394

$4,522

$1,196
3,092
439

$4,727

$2,452
4,656
595

$7,703

$2,336
4,604
601

$7,541

$2,458
4,898
661

$8,017

$   425
1,182
9

$1,616

$   334
1,408
16

$1,758

$  321
1,679
26

$2,026

$   172
1,646
17

$1,835

$   200
1,839
(11)

$2,028

$  428
1,807
3

$2,238

$  4,250
10,454
997

$15,701

$  3,970
10,879
1,000

$15,849

$  4,403
11,476
1,129

$17,008

percentage point benefit from currency, as continued
economic weakness and competitive pressures more
than offset the successful impact of new products, most
of which were launched in the second half of 2002.

Production: 2003 equipment sales grew 9 percent from
2002, as improved product mix, installation growth and
favorable currency of 7 percent more than offset price
declines of approximately 5 percent. Strong 2003 
production color equipment sales growth reflected
increased installations and stronger product mix driven
by the DocuColor 6060 and DocuColor iGen3 products.

The DocuColor iGen3 utilizes next generation color
technology which we expect will expand the digital
color print on demand market. 2003 production 
monochrome equipment sales grew modestly as light-
production installations, driven by the success of the
new Xerox 2101 copier/printer, and favorable currency
more than offset declines in production publishing,
printing and older technology light lens. 2002 equip-
ment sales declined 8 percent from 2001 reflecting
price declines of approximately 5 percent, weaker
product mix and installation declines driven largely 
by older technology light lens equipment.

Office: 2003 equipment sales grew 5 percent from
2002, as favorable currency of 7 percent and installa-
tion increases more than offset price declines of
approximately 10 percent and the impact of weaker
product mix. Equipment installation growth of approx-
imately 20 percent reflects growth in all monochrome
digital and color businesses, particularly office color
printing and our line of monochrome multifunction/
copier systems. The CopyCentre, WorkCentre and
WorkCentre Pro systems, which were launched in the
second quarter 2003, are intended to expand our mar-
ket reach and include new entry-level configurations
at more competitive prices. 2002 equipment sales
declined 5 percent from 2001, with approximately two-
thirds of the decline driven by older technology light
lens products. The remainder of the decline was due
to price declines of approximately 10 percent and
weaker product mix, which more than offset installa-
tion growth in our digital products.

DMO: 2003 equipment sales grew 27 percent from
2002, reflecting volume growth of over 40 percent,
partially offset by price declines of approximately 10
percent and unfavorable mix.

Other: 2003 equipment sales declined 14 percent from
2002 due to general sales declines, none of which
were individually significant. 2002 equipment sales
declined 53 percent from 2001, primarily reflecting our
exit from the SOHO business in 2001.

Post Sale and Other Revenue:

2003 post sale and other revenues of $10.5 billion
declined 4 percent from 2002, including a 5-percent-
age point benefit from currency. These declines reflect
lower equipment populations, as post sale revenue is
largely a function of the equipment placed at customer
locations and the volume of prints and copies that our
customers make on that equipment as well as associ-
ated services. 2003 supplies, paper and other sales of
$2.7 billion (included within post sale and other rev-
enue) declined 2 percent from 2002 primarily due to
declines in supplies. Supplies sales declined due to
reduced usage in the lower installed base of equip-
ment and our exit from the SOHO business in 2001.

2003 service, outsourcing and rental revenue of 
$7.7 billion declined 4 percent from 2002, reflecting
declines in rental and facilities management revenues.
Declines in rental revenues primarily reflect reduced
equipment populations within DMO and declines in
facilities management revenues reflect consolidations
by our customers as well as our prioritization of prof-
itable contracts. 2002 post sale and other revenues of
$10.9 billion declined 5 percent from 2001. 2002 sup-
plies, paper and other sales of $2.8 billion declined 
8 percent from 2001, primarily reflecting declines in
supplies. 2002 service, outsourcing and rental revenue
of $8.1 billion declined 4 percent from 2001 driven 
primarily by lower rental revenues in DMO.

Production: 2003 post sale and other revenue declined
2 percent from 2002, as favorable currency and
improved mix, driven largely by an increased volume
of color pages, were more than offset by the impact of
monochrome page volume declines, primarily in older
technology light lens products. 2002 post sale and
other revenue declined 2 percent from 2001, as
declines in monochrome page volumes more than 
offset the impact of improved mix due to significant
growth in color page volumes.

Office: 2003 post sale and other revenue grew 1 percent
from 2002, as favorable currency and strong digital
page growth more than offset declines in older tech-
nology light lens products. 2002 post sale and other
revenue declined 6 percent from 2001, as declines in
older technology light lens products more than offset
strong digital page growth.

DMO: 2003 post sale and other revenue declined 
16 percent from 2002, due largely to a lower rental
equipment population at customer locations and relat-
ed page volume declines. 2002 post sale and other rev-
enue declined 16 percent from 2001, due to a reduction
in the amount of equipment installations at certain
DMO customer locations as a result of reduced place-
ments in prior periods.

Other: 2003 post sale and other revenue declined 
10 percent from 2002, reflecting supply sale declines
in SOHO of $82 million as well as the absence of 
$50 million of third-party licensing revenue recognized
in 2002. See Note 3 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements for further discussion.

We expect 2004 equipment sales will continue to
grow, as we anticipate that new products launched in
2002, 2003 and those planned in 2004 will enable us to
further strengthen our market position. Our ability to
increase post sale revenue is dependent on our suc-
cess at increasing the amount of our equipment at
customer locations and the volume of pages generat-
ed on that equipment. In 2004, we expect post sale
and other revenue declines will continue to moderate

25

as equipment sales increase and our services and
solutions increase utilization of the equipment.
Accordingly, we expect 2004 total revenues to be in
line with 2003 levels.

Segment Operating Profit:

Segment operating profit and operating margin for
each of the three years ended December 31, 2003 were
as follows:

($ in millions)

2003

Operating Profit
Operating Margin

2002

Operating Profit
Operating Margin

2001

Operating Profit
Operating Margin

Production

Office

DMO

Other

Total

$422

9.3%

$450
10.0%

$372

7.9%

$753

9.8%

$621

8.2%

$427

5.3%

$151

9.3%

$91
5.2%

$(97)
(4.8%)

$(411)
(22.4%)

$(329)
(16.2%)

$(398)
(17.8%)

$915

5.8%

$833

5.3%

$304

1.8%

Production: 2003 operating profit declined $28 million
from 2002, reflecting lower gross margins related to
initial installations of DocuColor iGen3 and Xerox
2101. The decrease in gross margins was only partially
offset by lower R&D and SAG expenses. 2002 operat-
ing profit improved $78 million from 2001, reflecting
gross margin improvements and lower SAG expense,
including reduced bad debt levels.

Office: 2003 operating profit improved $132 million
from 2002, reflecting improved gross margins driven
primarily by improved manufacturing and service pro-
ductivity, as well as lower R&D and SAG expenses.
2002 operating profit improved by $194 million from
2001 as we focused on more profitable revenue,
improved our manufacturing and service productivity
and reduced SAG expenses.

DMO: 2003 operating profit improved $60 million from
2002 due to significantly lower SAG spending resulting
from our cost saving initiatives, lower bad debts and
gains on currency exposures compared to currency
exposure losses in 2002. These improvements were
partially offset by lower gross margins as a result of
declining post sale revenue. 2002 operating profit
improved by $188 million from the 2001 operating loss
due to reduced SAG spending resulting from our cost
base restructuring actions and lower bad debt levels,
as well as significant gross margin improvement driv-
en by our focus on profitability. DMO refined its busi-
ness model in 2002 by transitioning equipment
financing to third parties, improving credit policies
and implementing additional cost reduction actions.

Other: 2003 Other segment operating loss of $411 mil-
lion increased by $82 million from 2002, principally 
due to the loss on early extinguishment of debt of 
$73 million and lower SOHO profit of $39 million as our
supplies sales declined following our exit from this
business. In addition, 2002 included benefits of $33 mil-

lion related to the ESOP expense adjustment and $50
million of profit related to a licensing agreement. These
amounts were partially offset by the write-off of internal
use software of $106 million in 2002.

2002 Other segment loss of $329 million

decreased by $69 million from 2001, principally due to
our exit from SOHO in the second half of 2001, which
improved results by $272 million on a year over year
basis. Operating results were also favorably impacted
by lower non-financing interest expense of $49 mil-
lion, the $33 million beneficial year over year impact
of the ESOP expense adjustment and the $50 million
profit from the licensing agreement. These amounts
were offset by several items, including the write-off of
internal use software of $106 million, higher pension
and benefit expense of $93 million and higher adver-
tising expenses of $62 million.

Employee Stock Ownership Plan (ESOP): In 2002, 
our Board of Directors reinstated the dividend on our
ESOP, which resulted in a reversal of previously
recorded compensation expense. The reversal of 
compensation expense corresponded to the line item
in the Consolidated Statement of Income for 2002
where the charge was originally recorded and includ-
ed $28 million in both Cost of Sales and Selling,
administrative and general expenses and $11 million
in Research and Development expenses. Of the total
compensation expense originally recorded, $34 mil-
lion and $33 million was recognized in 2002 and 2001,
respectively. As such, 2002 benefited by the reversal of
$33 million of excess compensation expense that was
originally recorded in 2001. There is no corresponding
earnings per share improvement in 2002 since the EPS
calculation requires deduction of dividends declared
from reported net income in arriving at net income
available to common shareholders. See Note 12 to 
the Consolidated Financial Statements for a more
complete discussion of the ESOP, including current
funding status.

26

Gross Margin: Gross margins by revenue classification
were as follows:

Year Ended December 31,
2001
2002
2003

Total gross margin

42.0%
Sales
36.4%
Service, outsourcing and rentals 44.3%
Finance income
63.7%

42.4%
37.3%
44.5%
59.9%

38.2%
30.5%
42.2%
59.5%

The 2003 gross margin of 42.0 percent remained

strong and in line with our expectations, despite
declining 0.4 percentage points from 2002. During
2003, we completed the R&D phase of the DocuColor
iGen3 development and, therefore, beginning in July
2003, ongoing engineering costs associated with initial
commercial production are included in cost of sales.
DocuColor iGen3 ongoing engineering costs of $30 mil-
lion, the absence of the $28 million prior year favorable
ESOP adjustment and the absence of $50 million in
prior year licensing revenue each contributed 0.2 per-
centage points to the 2003 gross margin decline.
During 2003, manufacturing and service productivity
improvements more than offset the impact of lower
prices, higher pension and other employee benefit
costs and product mix.

2003 sales gross margin declined 0.9 percentage
points from 2002, with over half of the decline due to
DocuColor iGen3 ongoing engineering costs and the
remainder due to product mix as we increased our
penetration of the digital light production market. In
2003, manufacturing productivity more than offset 
the impact of planned lower prices. 2003 service, out-
sourcing and rentals margin declined 0.2 percentage
points from 2002. Improved productivity and product
mix more than offset lower prices and higher pension
and other employee expenses. 2002 also included a
0.4 percentage point benefit from a $50 million licens-
ing agreement and a 0.3 percentage point benefit 
due to favorable ESOP adjustments.

The 2002 gross margin of 42.4 percent improved

4.2 percentage points from 2001. 1.4 percentage
points of the increase reflects our second half 2001
SOHO exit. Improved manufacturing and service 
productivity, which more than offsetlower prices,
accounted for approximately one percentage point of
improvement and higher margins in our DMO operat-
ing segment accounted for approximately 0.5 percent-
age points of the improvement. The balance of the
increase includes the favorable ESOP compensation
expense adjustment, favorable transaction currency,
lower inventory charges associated with restructuring
actions and improved document outsourcing margins
associated with our focus on profitable revenue.

2002 sales gross margin improved 6.8 percentage

points from 2001. Approximately 2.6 percentage
points of the improvement was due to our SOHO exit,
approximately 1.3 percentage points was due to

increases in DMO, 0.6 percentage points was due to
lower inventory charges associated with restructuring
actions and the balance was largely due to manufac-
turing productivity, which more than offset competi-
tive price pressures. 2002 Service, outsourcing and
rentals margins improved by 2.3 percentage points
from 2001 reflecting the benefits of expense produc-
tivity actions and more profitable document outsourc-
ing contracts.

2003 Finance income gross margins increased 

3.8 percentage points from 2002 and similarly by 
0.4 percentage points from 2001, in line with declining
interest costs specific to equipment financing.
Equipment financing interest expense is determined
based on a combination of actual interest expense
incurred on financing debt, as well as our estimated
cost of funds, applied against the estimated level of
debt required to support our finance receivables. The
estimate is based on an assumed ratio which ranges
from 80-90% of our average finance receivables. This
methodology has been consistently applied for all
periods presented.

Research and Development: 2003 R&D spending of
$868 million was $49 million lower than 2002, primarily
due to a $30 million reduction associated with the
commercial launch of the DocuColor iGen3 and
improved R&D productivity, partially offset by higher
pension and other employee benefit expenses. We
expect 2004 R&D expense to range from 5-6 percent of
total revenues. We continue to invest in technological
development, particularly in color, and believe that 
our R&D spending is at an adequate level to remain
technologically competitive. Our R&D is strategically
coordinated with that of Fuji Xerox, which invested
$724 million in R&D in 2003. To maximize the syner-
gies of our relationship, our R&D expenditures are
focused on the Production segment while Fuji Xerox
R&D expenditures are focused on the Office segment.
2002 research and development spending of $917 mil-
lion was $80 million lower than 2001. Approximately
40 percent of the decline was due to our SOHO exit,
another 40 percent of the decline reflects both benefits
from cost restructuring actions and the receipt of
external funding and the balance reflects the previous-
ly discussed favorable ESOP compensation expense
adjustment.

Selling, Administrative and General Expenses: SAG
expense information was as follows ($ in millions):

Total Selling, administrative 
and general expenses
SAG as a percentage of 

Year Ended December 31,
2001
2002
2003

$4,249

$4,437

$4,728

revenue

27.1%

28.0%

27.8%

27

2003 SAG expense of $4.2 billion declined $188
million from 2002 including adverse currency impacts
of $172 million and $70 million of higher pension and
other employee benefit costs. 2003 SAG reductions
reflect improved productivity and employment reduc-
tions associated with our cost base restructuring,
lower bad debt expenses of $109 million and the
absence of 2002 expenses discussed below.

2002 SAG expense of $4.4 billion declined 

$291 million from 2001. The reduction includes lower
bad debt expenses of $106 million, lower SOHO
spending of $84 million and a $34 million favorable
property tax adjustment in North America. These
decreases were partially offset by $106 million of inter-
nal-use software impairment charges, $65 million of
higher advertising and marketing communications
spending, $18 million of increased professional fees
and $26 million of losses associated with the exit from
certain leased facilities. The balance of the reduction
primarily reflects employment reductions associated
with our cost base restructuring actions.

Bad debt expense included in SAG was $224 mil-
lion, $332 million and $438 million in 2003, 2002 and
2001, respectively. The 2003 reduction reflects
improved collections performance, receivables aging
and write-off trends. Lower expense in 2002 is due to
improved customer administration, collection prac-
tices and credit approval policies, as well as our rev-
enue declines. Bad debt expense as a percent of total
revenue was 1.4 percent, 2.1 percent and 2.6 percent
for 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.

Restructuring Programs: For the three years ended
December 31, 2003, we have engaged in a series of
restructuring programs, resulting in approximately
$1.6 billion in charges related to downsizing our
employee base, exiting certain businesses, outsourcing
some internal functions and engaging in other actions
designed to reduce our cost structure. In 2003, we
recorded restructuring and asset impairment charges of
$176 million, primarily consisting of new severance
actions and pension settlements related to previous
employee restructuring actions. We expect prospective
annual savings associated with 2003 actions to be
approximately $170 million, as compared to 2003 levels.
Restructuring and asset impairment charges of $670
million and $715 million in 2002 and 2001, respectively,
primarily relate to severance and employee benefits
related to worldwide terminations as well as certain
costs related to the consolidation of excess facilities. The
remaining restructuring reserve balance at December
31, 2003 for all programs was $221 million. Charges
related to previous employee restructuring actions of
approximately $20 million are expected to be recorded
in 2004, primarily related to pension settlements.

Worldwide employment declined by approximately
6,700 in 2003, to approximately 61,100, primarily reflect-
ing reductions as part of our restructuring programs.

28

Worldwide employment was approximately 67,800 and
78,900 at December 31, 2002 and 2001, respectively.

Gain on Affiliate’s Sale of Stock: In 2003, we recorded
cumulative gains on an affiliate’s sale of stock of 
$13 million reflecting our proportionate share of the
increase in equity of ScanSoft Inc., an equity invest-
ment. The gain resulted from ScanSoft’s issuance of
stock in connection with its acquisition of Speechworks,
Inc. ScanSoft is a developer of digital imaging soft-
ware that enables users to leverage the power of their
scanners, digital cameras and other electronic devices.
In 2001, the gain on affiliate’s sale of stock of $4 mil-
lion reflected our proportionate share of the increase
in equity of ScanSoft Inc., resulting from issuance of
their stock in connection with an acquisition.

Provision for Litigation: In 2003, we recorded a 
$239 million provision for litigation relating to the
court approved settlement of the Berger v. Retirement
Income Guarantee Plan (RIGP) litigation which is dis-
cussed in more detail in Note 15 to the Consolidated
Financial Statements.

Other Expenses, Net: Other expenses, net for the three
years ended December 31, 2003 consisted of the fol-
lowing:

($ in millions)

Non-financing interest expense
Interest income
Net currency losses (gains)
Legal and regulatory matters
Amortization of goodwill (2001 
only) and intangible assets

Loss (gain) on early 

extinguishment of debt

Business divestiture and asset 

sale losses (gains)

Minorities’ interests in earnings 

of subsidiaries

All other, net

Year Ended December 31,
2001
2002
2003

$522
(65)
11
3

$495
(77)
77
37

$544
(101)
(29)
–

36

73

13

6
38

36

(1)

(1)

3
24

94

(63)

10

2
53

$637

$593

$510

Non-financing interest expense: 2003 non-financing
interest expense was $27 million higher than 2002, 
primarily reflecting 2003 net losses of $13 million 
from the mark-to-market valuation of our interest rate
swaps compared to gains of $12 million in 2002. Due
to the inherent volatility in the interest rate markets,
we are unable to predict the amount of the above
noted mark-to-market gains or losses in future peri-
ods. 2003 non-financing interest expense included
higher interest rates and borrowing costs in the first
half of the year associated with the terms of the 2002
Credit Facility. These increased expenses were offset
by lower borrowing costs in the second half of 2003
following the June 2003 Recapitalization.

2002 non-financing interest expense was $49 mil-

lion lower than 2001 reflecting lower debt levels
throughout 2002 and lower borrowing costs in the first
half of the year, partially offset by higher interest rates
and borrowing costs in the second half of the year
associated with the terms of the 2002 Credit Facility.
Lower borrowing costs reflected the continued decline
in interest rates throughout 2002, coupled with our
higher proportion of variable rate debt in 2002 as 
compared to 2001. Our 2002 credit ratings were below
investment grade and effectively constrained our abili-
ty to fully use derivative contracts to manage interest
rate risk. Accordingly, although we benefited from
lower interest rates in 2002, we had greater exposure
to volatility in our results of operations. 2002 non-
financing interest expense included net gains of 
$12 million from the mark-to-market valuation of our
interest rate swaps.

Interest income: Interest income is derived primarily
from our invested cash balances and interest resulting
from periodic tax settlements. 2003 interest income
was $12 million lower than 2002 reflecting declining
interest rates and lower average cash balances, par-
tially offset by $13 million of interest income related to
Brazilian tax credits that became realizable in 2003.
2002 interest income was lower than 2001 due to
lower invested cash balances in the second half of
2002, resulting from the payment of significant out-
standing debt as well as lower interest rates.

Net currency losses (gains): Net currency losses
(gains) result from the re-measurement of unhedged
foreign currency-denominated assets and liabilities,
the spot/forward premiums on foreign exchange for-
ward contracts in those markets where we have been
able to restore economic hedging capability and eco-
nomic hedges of anticipated transactions for which we
do not qualify for cash flow hedge accounting treat-
ment under SFAS No. 133. Beginning with the second
half 2002 and throughout 2003, we restored currency
hedging capabilities, subject to limited exceptions in
certain closed markets. This should limit remeasure-
ment gains or losses in future periods. In 2003,
exchange losses of $11 million were due largely to
spot/forward premiums on foreign exchange forward
contracts and unfavorable currency movements on
economic hedges of anticipated transactions not qual-
ifying for hedge accounting treatment.

In the first half of 2002, we incurred $57 million of

exchange losses, primarily in Brazil and Argentina due
to the devaluation of the underlying currencies. In the
latter half of 2002, we were able to restore hedging
capability in the majority of our key markets. Therefore,
the $20 million of currency losses in the second half 
of 2002 primarily represented the spot/forward premi-
ums on foreign exchange forward contracts and unfa-
vorable currency movements on economic hedges of

anticipated transactions not qualifying for hedge
accounting treatment. In 2001, exchange gains on yen
debt of $107 million more than offset losses on Euro
loans of $36 million, a $17 million exchange loss result-
ing from the peso devaluation in Argentina and other
currency exchange losses of $25 million. The 2001 cur-
rency gains were the result of net unhedged positions
largely caused by our restricted access to the deriva-
tives markets beginning in the fourth quarter 2000.

Legal and regulatory matters: Legal and regulatory
matters for 2002 includes $27 million of expenses
related to certain litigation, indemnifications and asso-
ciated claims, as well as the $10 million penalty
incurred in connection with our settlement with the
SEC. See Note 15 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements for additional information.

Amortization of goodwill and intangible assets: Prior to
2002, goodwill and other intangible asset amortization
related primarily to our acquisitions of the remaining
minority interest in Xerox Limited in 1995 and 1997, 
XL Connect in 1998 and the Color Printing and Imaging
Division of Tektronix, Inc. in 2000. Effective January 1,
2002 and in connection with the adoption of SFAS No.
142, we no longer record amortization of goodwill.
Intangible assets continue to be amortized over their
useful lives. Further discussion is provided in Note 1 to
the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Loss (gain) on early extinguishment of debt: In 2003,
we recorded a $73 million loss on early extinguish-
ment of debt reflecting the write-off of the remaining
unamortized fees associated with the 2002 Credit
Facility. The 2002 Credit Facility was repaid upon com-
pletion of the June 2003 Recapitalization. In 2002, we
retired $52 million of long-term debt through the
exchange of 6.4 million shares of common stock val-
ued at $51 million. In 2001, we retired $374 million of
long-term debt through the exchange of 41 million
shares of common stock valued at $311 million. 
These transactions resulted in gains of $1 million 
and $63 million in 2002 and 2001, respectively.

Business divestiture and asset sale losses (gains):
Business divestitures and asset sales in all years
included miscellaneous land, buildings and equipment
sales. In addition, the 2003 amount primarily included
losses related to the sale of XES subsidiaries in France
and Germany, which was partially offset by a gain on
the sale of our investment in Xerox South Africa. The
2002 amount included the sales of our leasing busi-
ness in Italy, our investment in Prudential Insurance
company common stock and our equity investment in
Katun Corporation. The 2001 amount included the sale
of our Nordic leasing business. Further discussion is
included in Note 3 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements.

29

Income Taxes: The following table summarizes our
consolidated income taxes and the related effective
tax rate for each respective period:

($ in millions)

Pre-tax income
Income taxes
Effective tax rate (1)

Year Ended December 31,
2001
2002
2003

$436
134
30.7%

$104
4

$328
473

3.8% 144.2%

(1) A detailed reconciliation of the consolidated effective tax rate to the U.S.

federal statutory income tax rate is included in Note 13.

The difference between the 2003 consolidated
effective tax rate of 30.7 percent and the U.S. federal
statutory income tax rate of 35 percent relates primarily
to $35 million of tax benefits arising from the reversal
of valuation allowances on deferred tax assets follow-
ing a re-evaluation of their future realization due to
improved financial performance, other foreign adjust-
ments, including earnings taxed at different rates, the
impact of Series B Convertible Preferred Stock divi-
dends and state tax benefits. Such benefits were par-
tially offset by tax expense for audit and other tax
return adjustments, as well as $19 million of unrecog-
nized tax benefits primarily related to recurring losses
in certain jurisdictions where we continue to maintain
deferred tax asset valuation allowances.

The difference between the 2002 consolidated

effective tax rate of 3.8 percent and the U.S. federal
statutory income tax rate of 35 percent relates primari-
ly to the recognition of tax benefits resulting from the
favorable resolution of a foreign tax audit of approxi-
mately $79 million, tax law changes of approximately
$26 million and the impact of Series B Convertible
Preferred Stock dividends. Such benefits were offset,
in part, by tax expense recorded for the on-going
examination in India, the sale of our interest in Katun
Corporation, as well as recurring losses in certain
jurisdictions where we are not providing tax benefits
and continue to maintain deferred tax asset valuation
allowances.

The difference between the 2001 consolidated
effective tax rate of 144.2 percent and the U.S. federal
statutory income tax rate of 35 percent relates primari-
ly to the recognition of deferred tax asset valuation
allowances of $247 million from our recoverability
assessments, the taxes incurred in connection with the
sale of our partial interest in Fuji Xerox and recurring
losses in low tax jurisdictions. The gain for tax purpos-
es on the sale of Fuji Xerox was disproportionate to
the gain for book purposes as a result of a lower tax
basis in the investment. Other items favorably impact-
ing the tax rate included a tax audit resolution of
approximately $140 million and additional tax benefits
arising from prior period restructuring provisions.
Our consolidated effective income tax rate will
change based on discrete events (such as audit settle-
ments) as well as other factors including the geo-

30

graphical mix of income before taxes and the related
tax rates in those jurisdictions. We anticipate that our
2004 annual consolidated effective tax rate will
approximate 40 percent.

Equity in Net Income of Unconsolidated Affiliates:
Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates is
principally related to our 25 percent share of Fuji Xerox
income. Our 2003 equity in net income of $58 million
was comparable with 2002 and 2001 results of $54 mil-
lion and $53 million, respectively.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements: See Note 1 of
the Consolidated Financial Statements for a full
description of recent accounting pronouncements
including the respective dates of adoption and effects
on results of operations and financial condition.

Capital Resources and Liquidity:

Cash Flow Analysis: The following summarizes our
cash flows for the each of the three years ended
December 31, 2003, as reported in our Consolidated
Statements of Cash Flows in the accompanying
Consolidated Financial Statements:

($ in millions)

2003

2002

2001

Net cash provided by 
operating activities
Net cash provided by 
investing activities

Net cash used in 

financing activities
Effect of exchange rate 
changes on cash

(Decrease) increase in cash 
and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents 

$1,879

$1,980

$1,754

49

93

685

(2,470)

(3,292)

(189)

132

116

(10)

(410)

(1,103)

2,240

at beginning of year

2,887

3,990

1,750

Cash and cash equivalents 

at end of year

$2,477

$2,887

$3,990

Operating: For the year ended December 31, 2003,
operating cash flows of $1.9 billion reflect pre-tax
income of $436 million and the following non-cash
items: depreciation and amortization of $748 million,
provisions for receivables and inventory of $302 mil-
lion, the provision for the Berger litigation of $239 mil-
lion and a loss on early extinguishment of debt of 
$73 million. In addition, operating cash flows were
enhanced by finance receivable reductions of $496
million, cash generated from the early termination of
interest rate swaps of $136 million, accounts receiv-
able reductions of $164 million, driven by improved
collection efforts and other working capital improve-
ments of over $600 million. The Finance receivable
reduction results from collections of finance receiv-
ables associated with prior year sales that exceed
receivables generated from recent equipment sales.

This trend is expected to moderate as our equipment
sales continue to increase. These cash flows were par-
tially offset by pension plan contributions of $672 mil-
lion related to our decision to accelerate and increase
the 2003 funding level of our U.S. plans and increase
the 2003 funding level of our U.K. plans, restructuring
related cash payments of $345 million, income tax
payments of $207 million and $166 million of cash out-
flow supporting our on-lease equipment investment.
The $101 million decline in operating cash flow
versus 2002 primarily reflects increased pension plan
contributions of $534 million, lower finance receivable
reductions of $258 million reflecting the increase in
equipment sale revenue in 2003, and increased on-lease
equipment investment of $39 million. These items
were partially offset by increased pre-tax income of
$332 million, lower tax payments of $235 million and
increased cash proceeds from the early termination 
of interest rate swaps of $80 million. The lower tax
payments reflect the absence of the $346 million tax
payment associated with the 2001 sale of a portion of
our ownership interest in Fuji Xerox.

occurred at a much slower rate than in 2001 as inven-
tory reductions were offset by increased requirements
for new product launches.

We expect operating cash flows to approximate

$1.5 billion in 2004, as compared to $1.9 billion in
2003. The reduction contemplates finance receivables
growth as a result of continued expected equipment
sales expansion as well as the absence of early deriva-
tive contract termination cash flow, partially offset by
reduced restructuring payments and lower pension
contributions.

Investing: Investing cash flows for the year ended
December 31, 2003 consisted primarily of $235 million
released from restricted cash related to former rein-
surance obligations associated with our discontinued
operations, $35 million of aggregate cash proceeds
from the divestiture of our investment in Xerox South
Africa, XES France and Germany and other minor
investments, partially offset by capital and internal use
software spending of $250 million. We expect 2004
capital expenditures to approximate $250 million.

For the year ended December 31, 2002, operating

Investing cash flows for the year ended December

cash flows of $2.0 billion reflect pre-tax income of
$104 million and the following non-cash items: depre-
ciation and amortization of $1,035 million, provisions
for receivables and inventory of $468 million and
impairment of goodwill of $63 million. Cash flows
were also enhanced by finance receivable reductions
of $754 million due to collection of receivables from
prior year’s sales without an offsetting receivables
increase due to lower equipment sales in 2002, togeth-
er with a transition to third-party vendor financing
arrangements in the Nordic countries, Italy, Brazil and
Mexico. In addition, a restructuring charge of $670 mil-
lion was recorded during the period. These items were
partially offset by $442 million of tax payments,
including $346 million related to the 2001 sale of half
of our interest in Fuji Xerox, $392 million of restructur-
ing payments, $127 million of on-lease equipment
expenditures and a $138 million cash contribution to
our pension plans.

The $226 million improvement in operating cash
flow as compared to 2001 reflects increased finance
receivable collections of $666 million, an improvement
in cash flows from the early termination of derivative
contracts of $204 million, lower on-lease equipment
spending of $144 million and lower restructuring pay-
ments of $92 million. The decline in 2002 on-lease
equipment spending reflected declining rental place-
ment activity and populations, particularly in our
older-generation light-lens products. These items were
partially offset by higher cash taxes of $385 million,
higher pension contributions of $96 million and
increased working capital uses of over $400 million,
much of which was caused by the termination of an
accounts receivable sales facility. In addition, cash
flow generated by reducing inventory during 2002

31, 2002 consisted primarily of proceeds of $200 mil-
lion from the sale of our Italian leasing business, $53
million related to the sale of certain manufacturing
locations to Flextronics, $67 million related to the sale
of our interest in Katun and $19 million from the sale
of our investment in Prudential common stock. These
inflows were partially offset by capital and internal use
software spending of $196 million and increased
requirements of $63 million for restricted cash sup-
porting our vendor financing activities.

Investing cash flows in 2001 largely consisted of

the $1,768 million of cash received from sales of busi-
nesses, including one half of our interest in Fuji Xerox,
our leasing businesses in the Nordic countries and
certain manufacturing assets to Flextronics. These
cash proceeds were offset by capital and internal use
software spending of $343 million, a $255 million pay-
ment related to our funding of trusts to replace letters
of credit within our insurance discontinued operations,
$115 million of payments for the funding of escrow
requirements related to lease contracts transferred to
GE, $229 million of payments for the funding of
escrow requirements related to pre-funded interest
payments required to support our liabilities to trusts
issuing preferred securities and $217 million of pay-
ments for other contractual requirements.

Financing: Financing activities for the year ended
December 31, 2003 consisted of net proceeds from
secured borrowing activity with GE and other vendor
financing partners of $269 million, net proceeds from
the June 2003 convertible preferred stock offering of
$889 million, net proceeds from the June 2003 com-
mon stock offering of $451 million, offset by preferred
stock dividends of $57 million and other net cash out-

31

flows related to debt of $4.0 billion as detailed below:

Payments
2002 Credit Facility
Convertible Subordinated Debentures
Term debt and other

Borrowings, net of issuance costs
2010/2013 Senior Notes
2003 Credit Facility
All other

Net cash payments on debt

$ In Millions

$(3,490)
(560)
(1,596)

(5,646)

1,218
271
113

1,602

$(4,044)

Further details on our June 2003 Recapitalization
are included within the Liquidity, Financial Flexibility
and Funding Plans section of this MD&A.

Financing activities for the year ended December
31, 2002 consisted of $2.8 billion of debt repayments
on the terminated revolving credit facility, $710 million
on the 2002 Credit Facility, $1.9 billion of other sched-
uled debt payments and preferred stock dividends of
$67 million. These cash outflows were partially offset
by proceeds of $746 million from our 9.75 percent
Senior Notes offering and $1.4 billion of net proceeds
from secured borrowing activity with GE and other
vendor financing partners.

Financing activities for the comparable 2001 peri-

od consisted of scheduled debt repayments of $2.4 bil-
lion and dividends on our common and preferred
stock of $93 million. These outflows were offset by net

($ in millions)

GE secured loans:
United States
Canada
United Kingdom
Germany

Total GE encumbered finance receivables, net

Merrill Lynch Loan – France
Asset-backed notes – France
DLL – Netherlands, Spain, and Belgium
U.S. asset-backed notes
Other U.S. securitizations

Total encumbered finance receivables, net (1)

Unencumbered finance receivables, net

Total finance receivables, net

proceeds from secured borrowing activity of $1,350
million and proceeds from a loan from trust sub-
sidiaries issuing preferred securities of $1.0 billion.

Capital Structure and Liquidity: We provide equipment
financing to a significant majority of our customers.
Because the finance leases allow our customers to pay
for equipment over time rather than at the date of
installation, we need to maintain significant levels of
debt to support our investment in customer finance
leases. Since 2001, we have funded a significant por-
tion of our finance receivables through third-party ven-
dor financing arrangements. Securing the financing
debt with the receivables it supports, eliminates certain
significant refinancing, pricing and duration risks asso-
ciated with our debt. We are currently raising funds to
support our finance leasing through third-party vendor
financing arrangements, cash generated from opera-
tions and capital markets offerings. Over time, we
intend to increase the proportion of our total debt that
is associated with vendor financing programs.

During the years ended December 31, 2003 and
2002, we borrowed $2,450 million and $3,055 million,
respectively, under secured third-party vendor financ-
ing arrangements. Approximately 60 percent of our
total finance receivable portfolio has been pledged to
secure vendor financing loan arrangements at
December 31, 2003, compared with approximately 
50 percent a year earlier. We expect the pledged por-
tion of our finance receivable portfolio to range from
55-60 percent during 2004. The following table com-
pares finance receivables to financing-related debt as
of December 31, 2003 and 2002:

December 31, 2003

December 31, 2002

Finance
Receivables,
Net

Secured
Debt

Finance
Receivables,
Net

Secured
Debt

$2,598
440
570
84

3,692
92
364
277
–
–

$4,425

$2,939
528
719
114

4,300
138
429
335
–
–

5,202

3,611

$8,813

$2,323
319
529
95

3,266
377
–
111
139
7

$3,900

$2,430
347
691
95

3,563
413
–
113
247
101

4,437

4,568

$9,005

(1) Encumbered finance receivables represent the book value of finance receivables that secure each of the indicated loans.

32

As of December 31, 2003 and 2002, debt secured
by finance receivables was approximately 40 percent
and 28 percent of total debt, respectively. The follow-
ing represents our aggregate debt maturity schedule
as of December 31, 2003:

($ in millions)

2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
Thereafter

Total

Secured by
Finance 
Receiv- 
ables

Bonds/
Bank
Loans

$2,208
1,065
25
307
378
2,758

$2,028
1,064
461
468
404
–

Total
Debt

$  4,236(1)
2,129
486
775
782
2,758

$6,741

$4,425

$11,166

(1) Quarterly debt maturities for 2004 are $1,081, $1,087, $686 and $1,382 for

the first, second, third and fourth quarters, respectively.

The following table summarizes our secured and

unsecured debt as of December 31, 2003 and 2002:

($ in millions)

Credit Facility
Debt secured by finance 

receivables
Capital leases
Debt secured by other assets

Total Secured Debt

Credit Facility – unsecured
Senior Notes
Subordinated debt
Other Debt

Total Unsecured Debt

Total Debt

2003

2002

$     300

$    925

4,425
29
99

3,900
40
90

$  4,853

$  4,955

$          –
2,137
19
4,157

$  2,565
852
575
5,224

$  6,313

$  9,216

$11,166

$14,171

Liquidity, Financial Flexibility and Funding Plans: We
manage our worldwide liquidity using internal cash
management practices, which are subject to (1) the
statutes, regulations and practices of each of the local
jurisdictions in which we operate, (2) the legal require-
ments of the agreements to which we are a party and
(3) the policies and cooperation of the financial institu-
tions we utilize to maintain and provide cash manage-
ment services.

Recapitalization: In June 2003, we successfully com-
pleted a $3.6 billion Recapitalization which reduced
debt by $1.6 billion, increased common and preferred
equity by $1.3 billion and provided $0.7 billion of 
additional borrowing capacity. The Recapitalization
included the offering and sale of 9.2 million shares of 
6.25 percent Series C Mandatory Convertible Preferred
Stock, 46 million shares of Common Stock, $700 mil-
lion of 7.125 percent Senior Notes due 2010 and 
$550 million of 7.625 percent Senior Notes due 2013,
and the closing of our $1 billion 2003 Credit Facility.

Proceeds from the Recapitalization were used to fully
repay our 2002 Credit Facility. The 2003 Credit Facility
consists of a $300 million term loan and a $700 million
revolving credit facility (which includes a $200 million
sub-facility for letters of credit). Terms of the 2003
Credit Facility and the 2010 and 2013 Senior Notes are
included in Note 10 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements. The covenants under the 2003 Credit
Facility reflect our improved financial position. For
instance, there are no mandatory prepayments under
the 2003 Credit Facility and the interest rate is approxi-
mately 2 percentage points lower than the 2002 Credit
Facility. We expect that the reduced interest expense
in 2004 attributable to the Recapitalization will largely
offset the dilutive impact of the additional common
shares issued.

2003 Credit Facility: Xerox Corporation is the only bor-
rower of the term loan. The revolving credit facility is
available, without sub-limit, to Xerox Corporation and
certain of its foreign subsidiaries, including Xerox
Canada Capital Limited, Xerox Capital (Europe) plc
and other qualified foreign subsidiaries (excluding
Xerox Corporation, the “Overseas Borrowers”). The
2003 Credit Facility matures on September 30, 2008.
Debt issuance costs of $29 million were deferred in
conjunction with the 2003 Credit Facility.

Subject to certain limits described in the following

paragraph, the obligations under the 2003 Credit
Facility are secured by liens on substantially all the
assets of Xerox and each of our U.S. subsidiaries that
have a consolidated net worth from time to time of
$100 million or more (the “Material Subsidiaries”),
excluding Xerox Credit Corporation (“XCC”) and cer-
tain other finance subsidiaries, and are guaranteed by
certain Material Subsidiaries. Xerox Corporation is
required to guarantee the obligations of the Overseas
Borrowers. As of December 31, 2003, there were no
outstanding borrowings under the revolving credit
facility. However, as of December 31, 2003, the 
$300 million term loan and $51 million of letters of
credit were outstanding.

Under the terms of certain of our outstanding 
public bond indentures, the amount of obligations
under the 2003 Credit Facility that can be secured, as
described above, is limited to the excess of (x) 20 per-
cent of our consolidated net worth (as defined in the
public bond indentures) over (y) the outstanding
amount of certain other debt that is secured by the
Restricted Assets. Accordingly, the amount of 2003
Credit Facility debt secured by the Restricted Assets
will vary from time to time with changes in our consol-
idated net worth. The amount of security provided
under this formula is allocated ratably to the term loan
and revolving loans outstanding at any time.

The term loan and the revolving loans each bear

interest at LIBOR plus a spread that varies between
1.75 percent and 3 percent (or, at our election, at a

33

base rate plus a spread that varies between 0.75 per-
cent and 2 percent) depending on the then-current
leverage ratio, as defined, in the 2003 Credit Facility.
This rate was 3.42 percent at December 31, 2003.

The 2003 Credit Facility contains affirmative and

negative covenants including limitations on: issuance
of debt and preferred stock; investments and acquisi-
tions; mergers; certain transactions with affiliates; cre-
ation of liens; asset transfers; hedging transactions;
payment of dividends and certain other payments and
intercompany loans. The 2003 Credit Facility contains
financial maintenance covenants, including minimum
EBITDA, as defined, maximum leverage (total adjusted
debt divided by EBITDA), annual maximum capital
expenditures limits and minimum consolidated net
worth, as defined. These covenants are more fully dis-
cussed in Note 10.

The 2003 Credit Facility generally does not affect
our ability to continue to securitize receivables under
additional or existing third-party vendor financing
arrangements. Subject to certain exceptions, we can-
not pay cash dividends on our common stock during
the term of the 2003 Credit Facility, although we can
pay cash dividends on our preferred stock, provided
there is then no event of default under the 2003 Credit
Facility. Among defaults customary for facilities of this
type, defaults on our other debt, bankruptcy of certain
of our legal entities, or a change in control of Xerox
Corporation, would all constitute events of default
under the 2003 Credit Facility.

2010 and 2013 Senior Notes: We issued $700 million
aggregate principal amount of Senior Notes due 
2010 and $550 million aggregate principal amount of
Senior Notes due 2013 in connection with the June
2003 Recapitalization. Interest on the Senior Notes due 
2010 and 2013 accrues at the rate of 7.125 percent and
7.625 percent, respectively, per year and is payable
semiannually on each June 15 and December 15. In
conjunction with the issuance of the 2010 and 2013
Senior Notes, debt issuance costs of $32 million were
deferred. These notes, along with our Senior Notes
due 2009, are guaranteed by our wholly-owned sub-
sidiaries Intelligent Electronics, Inc. and Xerox
International Joint Marketing, Inc. Financial informa-
tion of these guarantors is included in Note 19 to the
Consolidated Financial Statements. The senior notes
also contain negative covenants (but no financial
maintenance covenants) similar to those contained in
the 2003 Credit Facility. However, they generally 
provide us with more flexibility than the 2003 Credit
Facility covenants, except that payment of cash 
dividends on the 6.25 percent Series C Mandatory
Convertible Preferred Stock is subject to certain 
conditions. See Note 10 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements for a description of the covenants.

Financing Business: We implemented third-party ven-

34

dor financing programs in the United States, Canada,
the U.K., France, The Netherlands, the Nordic coun-
tries, Italy, Brazil and Mexico through major initiatives
with GE, Merrill Lynch and other third-party vendors
to fund our finance receivables in these countries.
These initiatives include the completion of the U.S.
Loan Agreement with General Electric Capital
Corporation (“GECC”) (the “Loan Agreement”). See
Note 4 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for a
discussion of our vendor financing initiatives.

GECC U.S. Secured Borrowing Arrangement: In
October 2002, we finalized an eight-year Loan
Agreement with GECC. The Loan Agreement provides
for a series of monthly secured loans up to $5 billion
outstanding at any time ($2.6 billion outstanding at
December 31, 2003). The $5 billion limit may be
increased to $8 billion subject to agreement between
the parties. Additionally, the agreement contains
mutually agreed renewal options for successive two-
year periods. The Loan Agreement, as well as similar
loan agreements with GE in the U.K. and Canada,
incorporates the financial maintenance covenants
contained in the 2003 Credit Facility and contains
other affirmative and negative covenants.

Under the Loan Agreement, we expect GECC to
fund a significant portion of new U.S. lease origina-
tions at over-collateralization rates, which vary over
time, but are expected to approximate 10 percent at
the inception of each funding. The securitizations are
subject to interest rates calculated at each monthly
loan occurrence at yield rates consistent with average
rates for similar market based transactions. The funds
received under this agreement are recorded as
secured borrowings and the associated finance receiv-
ables are included in our Consolidated Balance Sheet.
GECC’s commitment to fund under this agreement is
not subject to our credit ratings.

Loan Covenants and Compliance: At December 31,
2003, we were in full compliance with the covenants
and other provisions of the 2003 Credit Facility, the
senior notes and the Loan Agreement and expect to
remain in full compliance for at least the next twelve
months. Any failure to be in compliance with any
material provision or covenant of the 2003 Credit
Facility or the senior notes could have a material
adverse effect on our liquidity and operations. Failure
to be in compliance with the covenants in the Loan
Agreement, including the financial maintenance
covenants incorporated from the 2003 Credit Facility,
would result in an event of termination under the Loan
Agreement and in such case GECC would not be
required to make further loans to us. If GECC were to
make no further loans to us and assuming a similar
facility was not established, it would materially
adversely affect our liquidity and our ability to fund our
customers’ purchases of our equipment and this could

materially adversely affect our results of operations.
We have the right at any time to prepay any loans out-
standing under or terminate the 2003 Credit Facility.

unlikely we will be able to access the low-interest
commercial paper markets or to obtain unsecured
bank lines of credit.

Credit Ratings: Our credit ratings as of February 27,
2004 were as follows:

Senior
Unsecured

Debt Outlook

Comments

Moody’s (1)

B1

Stable

S&P

Fitch

B+ Negative

BB

Stable

The Moody’s rating was 
upgraded from B1 
(with a negative outlook) 
in December 2003.
The S&P rating on Senior 
Secured Debt is BB-.
The Fitch rating was upgraded 
from BB- (with a negative 
outlook) in June 2003.

(1) In December 2003, Moody’s assigned to Xerox a first time SGL-1 rating.

Our ability to obtain financing and the related cost
of borrowing is affected by our debt ratings, which are
periodically reviewed by the major credit rating agen-
cies. Our current credit ratings are below investment
grade and we expect our access to the public debt
markets to be limited to the non-investment grade
segment until our ratings have been restored.
Specifically, until our credit ratings improve, it is

Long-term debt, including capital lease obligations (1)
Minimum operating lease commitments (2)
Liabilities to subsidiary trusts issuing preferred securities (3)

Total contractual cash obligations

Summary – Financial Flexibility and Liquidity: With
$2.5 billion of cash and cash equivalents on hand at
December 31, 2003 and borrowing capacity under our
2003 Credit Facility of $700 million, less $51 million uti-
lized for letters of credit, we believe our liquidity
(including operating and other cash flows that we
expect to generate) will be sufficient to meet operating
cash flow requirements as they occur and to satisfy all
scheduled debt maturities for at least the next twelve
months. Our ability to maintain positive liquidity going
forward depends on our ability to continue to generate
cash from operations and access to the financial mar-
kets, both of which are subject to general economic,
financial, competitive, legislative, regulatory and other
market factors that are beyond our control. We cur-
rently have a $2.5 billion shelf registration that enables
us to access the market on an opportunistic basis and
offer both debt and equity securities.

Contractual Cash Obligations and Other Commercial
Commitments and Contingencies: At December 31,
2003, we had the following contractual cash obliga-
tions and other commercial commitments and contin-
gencies ($ in millions):

Year 1
2004

$4,194
235
1,067

$5,496

Years 2-3

Years 4-5

2005

$2,129
190
–

$2,319

2006

$486
148
77

$711

2007

$775
118
–

$893

2008

$782
96
–

$878

There-
after

$2,758
383
665

$3,806

(1) Refer to Note 10 to our Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information related to long-term debt (amounts include principal portion only).

(2) Refer to Notes 5 and 6 to our Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information related to minimum operating lease commitments.

(3) Refer to Note 14 to our Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information related to liabilities to subsidiary trusts issuing preferred securities

(amounts include principal portion only). The amounts shown above correspond to the year in which the preferred securities can first be put to us. We have
the option to settle the 2004 amounts in stock if such loan is put to us.

Other Commercial Commitments and
Contingencies:

Pension and Other Post-Retirement Benefit Plans: We
sponsor pension and other post-retirement benefit
plans that require periodic cash contributions. Our
2003 cash fundings for these plans were $672 million
for pensions and $101 million for other post-retire-
ment plans. Our anticipated cash fundings for 2004 are
$63 million for pensions and $114 million for other
post-retirement plans. Cash contribution requirements
for our domestic tax qualified pension plans are gov-
erned by the Employment Retirement Income Security
Act (ERISA) and the Internal Revenue Code. Cash con-
tribution requirements for our international plans are
subject to the applicable regulations in each country.
The expected contributions for pensions for 2004 of

$63 million include no expected contributions to the
domestic tax qualified plans because these plans have
already exceeded the ERISA minimum funding
requirements for the plans’ 2003 plan year due to
funding of approximately $450 million in 2003. Of this
amount, $325 million was accelerated or in excess of
required amounts. Our post-retirement plans are non-
funded and are almost entirely related to domestic
operations. Cash contributions are made each year to
cover medical claims costs incurred in that year.

Flextronics: As previously discussed, in 2001 we out-
sourced certain manufacturing activities to Flextronics
under a five-year agreement. During 2003, we pur-
chased approximately $910 million of inventory from
Flextronics. We anticipate that we will purchase
approximately $915 million of inventory from

35

Flextronics during 2004 and expect to increase this
level commensurate with our sales in the future.

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements:

Fuji Xerox: We had product purchases from Fuji Xerox
totaling $871 million, $727 million, and $598 million in
2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively. Our purchase com-
mitments with Fuji Xerox are in the normal course of
business and typically have a lead time of three
months. We anticipate that we will purchase approxi-
mately $1 billion of products from Fuji Xerox in 2004.
Related party transactions with Fuji Xerox are disclosed
in Note 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Other Purchase Commitments: We enter into other
purchase commitments with vendors in the ordinary
course of business. Our policy with respect to all 
purchase commitments is to record losses, if any,
when they are probable and reasonably estimable.
We currently do not have, nor do we anticipate, 
material loss contracts.

EDS Contract: We have an information management
contract with Electronic Data Systems Corp. to pro-
vide services to us for global mainframe system pro-
cessing, application maintenance and enhancements,
desktop services and helpdesk support, voice and
data network management, and server management.
In 2001, we extended the original ten-year contract
through June 30, 2009. Although there are no mini-
mum payments required under the contract, we antic-
ipate making the following payments to EDS over the
next five years (in millions): 2004—$331; 2005—$332;
2006—$317; 2007—$307; 2008—$302. The estimated
payments are the result of an EDS and Xerox Global
Demand Case process that has been in place for eight
years. Twice a year, using this estimating process
based on historical activity, the parties agree on a pro-
jected volume of services to be provided under each
major element of the contract. Pricing for the base
services (which are comprised of global mainframe
system processing, application maintenance and
enhancements, desktop services and help desk sup-
port, voice and data management) were established
when the contract was signed in 1994 based on our
actual costs in preceding years. The pricing was modi-
fied through comparisons to industry benchmarks
and through negotiations in subsequent amend-
ments. Prices and services for the period July 1, 2004
through June 30, 2009 are currently being negotiated
and, as such, are subject to change. Under the current
contract, we can terminate the contract with six
months notice, as defined in the contract, with no ter-
mination fee and with payment to EDS for incurred
costs as of the termination date. We have an option to
purchase the assets placed in service under the EDS
contract, should we elect to terminate the contract
and either operate those assets ourselves or enter a
separate contract with a similar service provider.

36

As discussed in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements, in December 2003, we adopted Financial
Accounting Standards Board Interpretation No. 46R
“Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an interpre-
tation of ARB 51” (“FIN 46R”). As a result of our adop-
tion of FIN 46R, we deconsolidated certain subsidiary
trusts which were previously consolidated. All periods
presented have been reclassified to reflect this change.
As discussed further in Note 14 to the Consolidated
Financial Statements, “Liability to Subsidiary Trusts
Issuing Preferred Securities,” these trusts previously
issued preferred securities. Although the preferred
securities issued by these subsidiaries are not reflected
on our consolidated balance sheets, we have reflected
our obligations to them in the liability caption, “Liability
to Subsidiary Trusts Issuing Preferred Securities.” The
nature of our obligations to these deconsolidated sub-
sidiaries are discussed in Note 14.

Although we generally do not utilize off-balance
sheet arrangements in our operations, we enter into
operating leases in the normal course of business.
The nature of these lease arrangements is discussed
in Note 6 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Additionally, we utilize special purpose entities
(“SPEs”) in conjunction with certain vendor financing
transactions. The SPEs utilized in conjunction with
these transactions are consolidated in our financial
statements in accordance with applicable accounting
standards. These transactions, which are discussed
further in Note 4 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements, have been accounted for as secured bor-
rowings with the debt and related assets remaining
on our balance sheets. Although the obligations relat-
ed to these transactions are included in our balance
sheet, recourse is generally limited to the secured
assets and no other assets of the Company.

Financial Risk Management:

As a multinational company, we are exposed to mar-
ket risk from changes in foreign currency exchange
rates and interest rates that could affect our results of
operations and financial condition. As a result of our
improved liquidity and financial position, our ability to
utilize derivative contracts as part of our risk manage-
ment strategy, described below, has substantially
improved. Certain of these hedging arrangements do
not qualify for hedge accounting treatment under
SFAS 133. Accordingly, our results of operations are
exposed to some volatility, which we attempt to mini-
mize or eliminate whenever possible. The level of
volatility will vary with the level of derivative hedges
outstanding, as well as the currency and interest rate
market movements in the period.

We enter into limited types of derivative contracts,

including interest rate swap agreements, foreign cur-

rency swap agreements, cross currency interest rate
swap agreements, forward exchange contracts, pur-
chased foreign currency options and purchased inter-
est rate collars, to manage interest rate and foreign
currency exposures. The fair market values of all our
derivative contracts change with fluctuations in inter-
est rates and/or currency rates and are designed so
that any changes in their values are offset by changes
in the values of the underlying exposures. Our deriva-
tive instruments are held solely to hedge economic
exposures; we do not enter into derivative instrument
transactions for trading or other speculative purposes
and we employ long-standing policies prescribing that
derivative instruments are only to be used to achieve a
very limited set of objectives.

Our primary foreign currency market exposures
include the Japanese yen, Euro, British pound sterling,
Brazilian real, and Canadian dollar. For each of our
legal entities, we generally hedge foreign currency
denominated assets and liabilities, primarily through
the use of derivative contracts. In entities with signifi-
cant assets and liabilities, we use derivative contracts
to hedge the net exposure in each currency, rather than
hedging each asset and liability separately. We typical-
ly enter into simple unleveraged derivative transac-
tions. Our policy is to transact derivatives only with
counterparties having an investment-grade or better
rating and to monitor market risk and exposure for
each counterparty. We also utilize arrangements with
each counterparty that allow us to net gains and losses
on separate contracts. This further mitigates the credit
risk associated with our financial instruments. Based
upon our ongoing evaluation of the replacement cost
of our derivative transactions and counterparty credit
worthiness, we consider the risk of a material default
by any of our counterparties to be remote.

Some of our derivative contracts and several other

material contracts at December 31, 2003 require us to
post cash collateral or maintain minimum cash bal-
ances in escrow. These cash amounts are reported in
our Consolidated Balance Sheets within Other current
assets or other long-term assets, depending on when
the cash will be contractually released, as presented in
Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Assuming a 10 percent appreciation or deprecia-

tion in foreign currency exchange rates from the quot-
ed foreign currency exchange rates at December 31,
2003, the potential change in the fair value of foreign
currency-denominated assets and liabilities in each
entity would be insignificant because all material cur-
rency asset and liability exposures were hedged as of
December 31, 2003. A 10 percent appreciation or
depreciation of the U.S. Dollar against all currencies
from the quoted foreign currency exchange rates at
December 31, 2003 would have a $443 million impact
on our Cumulative Translation Adjustment portion of
equity. The amount permanently invested in foreign
subsidiaries and affiliates, primarily Xerox Limited,

Fuji Xerox and Xerox do Brasil, and translated into
dollars using the year-end exchange rates, was 
$4.4 billion at December 31, 2003, net of foreign 
currency-denominated liabilities designated as a
hedge of our net investment.

Interest Rate Risk Management: The consolidated
weighted-average interest rates related to our debt
and liabilities to subsidiary trusts issuing preferred
securities for 2003, 2002 and 2001 approximated 
6.0 percent, 5.0 percent, and 5.5 percent, respectively.
Interest expense includes the impact of our interest
rate derivatives.

Virtually all customer-financing assets earn fixed
rates of interest. As discussed above, a significant por-
tion of those assets has been pledged to secure ven-
dor financing loan arrangements and the interest rates
on a significant portion of those loans are fixed. As we
implement additional third-party vendor financing
arrangements and continue to repay existing debt, the
proportion of our financing assets which is match-
funded against related secured debt will increase.

As of December 31, 2003, approximately $2.7 bil-

lion of our debt bears interest at variable rates, includ-
ing the effect of pay-variable interest rate swaps we
are utilizing to reduce the effective interest rate on 
our debt.

The fair market values of our fixed-rate financial
instruments, including debt and interest-rate deriva-
tives, are sensitive to changes in interest rates. At
December 31, 2003, a 10 percent change in market
interest rates would change the fair values of such
financial instruments by $297 million.

Forward-Looking Cautionary Statements:

This Annual Report contains forward-looking statements
and information relating to Xerox that are based on
our beliefs, as well as assumptions made by and infor-
mation currently available to us. The words “antici-
pate,” “believe,” “estimate,” “expect,” “intend,”
“will,” “should” and similar expressions, as they
relate to us, are intended to identify forward-looking
statements. Actual results could differ materially from
those projected in such forward-looking statements.
Information concerning certain factors that could
cause actual results to differ materially is included in
our 2003 Annual Report on Form 10-K filed with the
SEC. We do not intend to update these forward-looking
statements.

37

Consolidated Statements of Income

Year ended December 31, (in millions, except per-share data)

2003

2002

2001

Revenues
Sales
Service, outsourcing and rentals
Finance income

Total Revenues

Costs and Expenses
Cost of sales
Cost of service, outsourcing and rentals
Equipment financing interest
Research and development expenses
Selling, administrative and general expenses
Restructuring and asset impairment charges
Gain on sale of half of interest in Fuji Xerox
Gain on affiliate’s sale of stock
Provision for litigation
Other expenses, net

Total Costs and Expenses

Income before Income Taxes, Equity Income 

and Cumulative Effect of Change in 
Accounting Principle

Income taxes

Income (Loss) before Equity Income 

and Cumulative Effect of Change in Accounting Principle

Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates

Income (Loss) before Cumulative Effect 
of Change in Accounting Principle

Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle

Net Income (Loss)
Less: Preferred stock dividends, net

$  6,970
7,734
997

15,701

$  6,752
8,097
1,000

15,849

$  7,443
8,436
1,129

17,008

4,436
4,311
362
868
4,249
176
–
(13)
239
637

4,233
4,494
401
917
4,437
670
–
–
–
593

5,170
4,880
457
997
4,728
715
(773)
(4)
–
510

15,265

15,745

16,680

436
134

302
58

360
–

360
(71)

104
4

100
54

154
(63)

91
(73)

328
473

(145)
53

(92)
(2)

(94)
(12)

Income (Loss) available to common shareholders

$     289

$       18

$    (106)

Basic Earnings (Loss) per Share

Income (Loss) before Cumulative Effect 
of Change in Accounting Principle

Net Earnings (Loss) per Share

Diluted Earnings (Loss) per Share

Income (Loss) before Cumulative Effect 
of Change in Accounting Principle

Net Earnings (Loss) per Share

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

$    0.38

$    0.38

$    0.11

$    0.02

$   (0.15)

$   (0.15)

$    0.36

$    0.36

$    0.10

$    0.02

$   (0.15)

$   (0.15)

38

Consolidated Balance Sheets

December 31, (in millions)

Assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Accounts receivable, net
Billed portion of finance receivables, net
Finance receivables, net
Inventories
Other current assets

Total Current Assets

Finance receivables due after one year, net
Equipment on operating leases, net
Land, buildings and equipment, net
Investments in affiliates, at equity
Intangible assets, net
Goodwill
Deferred tax assets, long-term
Other long-term assets

Total Assets

Liabilities and Equity
Short-term debt and current portion of long-term debt
Accounts payable
Accrued compensation and benefits costs
Unearned income
Other current liabilities

Total Current Liabilities

Long-term debt
Pension and other benefit liabilities
Post-retirement medical benefits
Liabilities to subsidiary trusts issuing preferred securities
Other long-term liabilities

Total Liabilities

Series B convertible preferred stock
Series C mandatory convertible preferred stock
Common stock, including additional paid in capital
Retained earnings
Accumulated other comprehensive loss

Total Liabilities and Equity

2003

2002

$  2,477
2,159
461
2,981
1,152
1,105

10,335
5,371
364
1,827
644
325
1,722
1,526
2,477

$  2,887
2,072
564
3,088
1,231
1,187

11,029
5,353
450
1,757
695
360
1,564
1,592
2,750

$24,591

$25,550

$  4,236
898
532
251
1,652

7,569
6,930
1,058
1,268
1,809
1,278

19,912
499
889
3,239
1,315
(1,263)

$  4,377
839
481
257
1,833

7,787
9,794
1,307
1,251
1,793
1,217

23,149
508
–
2,739
1,025
(1,871)

$24,591

$25,550

Shares of common stock issued and outstanding were (in thousands) 793,884 and 738,273 at December 31, 2003 and December 31, 2002, respectively.

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

39

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

Year ended December 31, (in millions)

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:
Net income (loss)
Adjustments required to reconcile net income (loss) 

to cash flows from operating activities:
Provision for litigation
Depreciation and amortization
Impairment of goodwill
Provisions for receivables and inventory
Restructuring and other charges
Deferred tax benefit
Loss (gain) on early extinguishment of debt
Cash payments for restructurings
Contributions to pension benefit plans
Net gains on sales of businesses, assets and affiliate’s sale of stock
Undistributed equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates
Decrease in inventories
Increase in on-lease equipment
Decrease in finance receivables
(Increase) decrease in accounts receivable and billed portion of 

finance receivables

Increase (decrease) in accounts payable and accrued compensation
Net change in income tax assets and liabilities
Decrease in other current and long-term liabilities
Early termination of derivative contracts
Other, net

Net cash provided by operating activities

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:
Cost of additions to land, buildings and equipment
Proceeds from sales of land, buildings and equipment
Cost of additions to internal use software
Proceeds from divestitures, net
Net change in escrow and other restricted investments
Other, net

Net cash provided by investing activities

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:
Cash proceeds from new secured financings
Debt payments on secured financings
Net cash payments on debt
Proceeds from issuance of mandatorily redeemable preferred stock
Dividends on common and preferred stock
Proceeds from issuances of common stock
Proceeds from loans to trusts issuing preferred securities
Settlements of equity put options, net
Dividends to minority shareholders

Net cash used in financing activities

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

(Decrease) increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

40

2003

2002

2001

$    360

$      91

$     (94)

239
748
–
302
176
(70)
73
(345)
(672)
(1)
(37)
62
(166)
496

164
414
(3)
(43)
136
46

–
1,035
63
468
670
(178)
(1)
(392)
(138)
(1)
(23)
16
(127)
754

(266)
330
(260)
(109)
56
(8)

–
1,332
–
748
715
(10)
(63)
(484)
(42)
(765)
(20)
319
(271)
88

189
(228)
428
(95)
(148)
155

1,879

1,980

1,754

(197)
10
(53)
35
254
–

49

2,450
(2,181)
(4,044)
889
(57)
477
–
–
(4)

(2,470)

132

(410)
2,887

(146)
19
(50)
340
(63)
(7)

93

3,055
(1,662)
(4,619)
–
(67)
4
–
–
(3)

(3,292)

116

(1,103)
3,990

(219)
69
(124)
1,768
(816)
7

685

2,418
(1,068)
(2,448)
–
(93)
28
1,004
(28)
(2)

(189)

(10)

2,240
1,750

$ 2,477

$ 2,887

$ 3,990

Consolidated Statement of Common Shareholders’ Equity

Common
Stock
Shares

668,576

Common 
Stock
Amount

$670

Additional 
Paid-In
Capital

$1,561

Accumulated
Retained Other Compre-
hensive Loss(1)
Earnings

$1,150

$(1,580)

(In millions, except share data) 

Balance at December 31, 2000

Net loss
Translation adjustments
Minimum pension liability, net of tax
Unrealized gain on securities, net of tax
FAS 133 transition adjustment
Unrealized gains on cash flow 

hedges, net of tax
Comprehensive loss
Stock option and incentive plans, net
Convertible securities
Common stock dividends ($0.05 per share)
Series B convertible preferred stock 

dividends ($1.56 per share), net of tax 

Equity for debt exchanges
Issuance of unregistered shares
Other

Balance at December 31, 2001

Net income
Translation adjustments(2)
Minimum pension liability, net of tax
Unrealized gain on securities, net of tax
Unrealized gains on cash flow 

hedges, net of tax
Comprehensive income
Stock option and incentive plans, net
Convertible securities
Series B convertible preferred stock 

dividends ($10.94 per share), net of tax 

Equity for debt exchanges
Other

Balance at December 31, 2002

Net income
Translation adjustments
Minimum pension liability, net of tax
Unrealized gain on securities, net of tax
Unrealized gains on cash flow hedges, net of tax
Comprehensive income
Stock option and incentive plans, net
Common stock offering
Series B convertible preferred stock 

dividends ($6.25 per share), net of tax 
Series C mandatory convertible preferred 

stock dividends ($3.23 per share)

546
5,865

41,154
5,861
312

722,314

2,385
7,118

6,412
44

738,273

$724

$1,898

$1,008

$(1,833)

$1,797

(210)
(40)
4
(19)

12

(94)

(34)

(12)

(2)

1
6

41
6

5
36

270
22
4

2
7

6
(1)

10
48

45

$738

$2,001

91

(73)

(1)

$1,025

360

234
(279)
1

6

$(1,871)

547
42
17
2

Total

$1,801

(94)
(210)
(40)
4
(19)

12
$  (347)
6
42
(34)

(12)
311
28
2

91
234
(279)
1

6
$      53
12
55

(73)
51
(2)

$1,893

360
547
42
17
2
$   968
50
451

(41)

(30)
–

9,530
46,000

9
46

41
405

(41)

(30)
1

(2)

Other

Balance at December 31, 2003

81

793,884

1

$794

$2,445

$1,315

$(1,263)

$3,291

(1) As of December 31, 2003, Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss is composed of cumulative translation adjustments of $(977), unrealized gain on 

securities of $17, minimum pension liabilities of $(304) and cash flow hedging gains of $1.

(2) Includes reclassification adjustments for foreign currency translation losses of $59, that were realized in 2002 due to the sale of businesses. These
amounts were included in accumulated other comprehensive loss in prior periods as unrealized losses. Refer to Note 3 for further discussion.

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

41

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

(Dollars in millions, except per-share data and unless otherwise indicated)

Note 1 – Summary of Significant
Accounting Policies

References herein to “we,” “us” or “our” refer to
Xerox Corporation and its subsidiaries unless the con-
text specifically requires otherwise.

Description of Business and Basis of Presentation: We
are a technology and services enterprise, as well as a
leader in the global document market, developing,
manufacturing, marketing, servicing and financing a
complete range of document equipment, software,
solutions and services.

Liquidity, Financial Flexibility and Funding Plans: We
manage our worldwide liquidity using internal cash
management practices which are subject to (1) the
statutes, regulations and practices of each of the local
jurisdictions in which we operate, (2) the legal require-
ments of the agreements to which we are parties and
(3) the policies and cooperation of the financial institu-
tions we utilize to maintain and provide cash manage-
ment services.

In June 2003, we completed a $3.6 billion recapi-

talization (the “Recapitalization”) that included the
offering and sale of 9.2 million shares of 6.25 percent
Series C Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock, 
46 million shares of Common Stock, $700 of 7.125 per-
cent Senior Notes due 2010 and $550 of 7.625 percent
Senior Notes due 2013 and the closing of our new 
$1.0 billion credit agreement which matures on
September 30, 2008 (the “2003 Credit Facility”). The
2003 Credit Facility consists of a fully drawn $300 term
loan and a $700 revolving credit facility (which includes
a $200 sub-facility for letters of credit). The proceeds
from the Recapitalization were used to repay the
amounts outstanding under the Amended and
Restated Credit Agreement we entered into in June
2002 (the “2002 Credit Facility”). Upon repayment of
amounts outstanding, the 2002 Credit Facility was ter-
minated and we incurred a $73 charge associated with
unamortized debt issuance costs.

On December 31, 2003, we had $700 of borrowing
capacity under the 2003 Credit Facility, less $51 utilized
for letters of credit. The 2003 Credit Facility contains
affirmative and negative covenants, financial mainte-
nance covenants and other limitations. The indentures
governing our outstanding senior notes contain sever-
al affirmative and negative covenants. The senior
notes do not, however, contain any financial mainte-
nance covenants. The covenants and other limitations

42

contained in the 2003 Credit Facility and the senior
notes are more fully discussed in Note 10. Our U.S.
Loan Agreement with General Electric Capital
Corporation (“GECC”) (effective through 2010) relating
to our vendor financing program (the “Loan
Agreement”) provides for a series of monthly secured
loans up to $5 billion outstanding at any time. As of
December 31, 2003, $2.6 billion was outstanding
under the Loan Agreement. The Loan Agreement, as
well as similar loan agreements with GE in the U.K.
and Canada that are discussed further in Note 4, incor-
porates the financial maintenance covenants con-
tained in the 2003 Credit Facility and contains other
affirmative and negative covenants.

At December 31, 2003, we were in full compliance

with the covenants and other provisions of the 
2003 Credit Facility, the senior notes and the Loan
Agreement and we expect to remain in full compli-
ance for at least the next twelve months. Any failure 
to be in compliance with any material provision or
covenant of the 2003 Credit Facility or the senior notes
could have a material adverse effect on our liquidity
and operations. Failure to be in compliance with the
covenants in the Loan Agreement, including the finan-
cial maintenance covenants incorporated from the
2003 Credit Facility, would result in an event of termi-
nation under the Loan Agreement and in such case
GECC would not be required to make further loans to
us. If GECC were to make no further loans to us and
assuming a similar facility was not established, it
would materially adversely affect our liquidity and our
ability to fund our customers’ purchases of our equip-
ment and this could materially adversely affect our
results of operations.

With $2.5 billion of cash and cash equivalents on

hand at December 31, 2003 and borrowing capacity
under our 2003 Credit Facility of $700, less $51 utilized
for letters of credit, we believe our liquidity (including
operating and other cash flows that we expect to gen-
erate) will be sufficient to meet operating cash flow
requirements as they occur and to satisfy all sched-
uled debt maturities for at least the next twelve
months. Our ability to maintain positive liquidity going
forward depends on our ability to continue to generate
cash from operations and access the financial mar-
kets, both of which are subject to general economic,
financial, competitive, legislative, regulatory and other
market factors that are beyond our control.

Our ability to obtain financing and the related cost
of borrowing is affected by our debt ratings, which are
periodically reviewed by the major credit rating agen-
cies. Our current credit ratings are below investment

grade and we expect our access to the public debt
markets to be limited to the non-investment grade
segment until our ratings have been restored.
Specifically, until our credit ratings improve, it is
unlikely we will be able to access the low-interest
commercial paper markets or to obtain unsecured
bank lines of credit.

We currently have a $2.5 billion shelf registration
that enables us to access the market on an opportunis-
tic basis and offer both debt and equity securities.

Basis of Consolidation: The Consolidated Financial
Statements include the accounts of Xerox Corporation
and all of our controlled subsidiary companies. All sig-
nificant intercompany accounts and transactions have
been eliminated. Investments in business entities in
which we do not have control, but we have the ability
to exercise significant influence over operating and
financial policies (generally 20 to 50 percent owner-
ship), are accounted for using the equity method of
accounting. Upon the sale of stock of a subsidiary, we
recognize a gain or loss in our Consolidated
Statements of Income equal to our proportionate
share of the corresponding increase or decrease in
that subsidiary’s equity. Operating results of acquired
businesses are included in the Consolidated
Statements of Income from the date of acquisition
and, for variable interest entities in which we are
determined to be the primary beneficiary, from the
date such determination is made.

Income before Income Taxes, Equity Income and
Cumulative Effect of Change in Accounting Principle:
Throughout the Notes to the Consolidated Financial
Statements, we refer to the effects of certain changes
in estimates and other adjustments on Income before
Income Taxes, Equity Income and Cumulative Effect of
Change in Accounting Principle. For convenience and
ease of reference, that caption in our Consolidated
Statements of Income is hereafter referred to as 
“pre-tax income.”

Use of Estimates: The preparation of our Consolidated
Financial Statements in accordance with accounting
principles generally accepted in the United States of
America requires that we make estimates and
assumptions that affect the reported amounts of
assets and liabilities, as well as the disclosure of con-
tingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial
statements, and the reported amounts of revenues
and expenses during the reporting period. Significant
estimates and assumptions are used for, but not limit-
ed to: (i) allocation of revenues and fair values in leas-
es and other multiple element arrangements; (ii)
accounting for residual values; (iii) economic lives of

leased assets; (iv) allowance for doubtful accounts; 
(v) inventory valuation; (vi) restructuring and related
charges; (vii) asset impairments; (viii) depreciable lives
of assets; (ix) useful lives of intangible assets; (x) pen-
sion and post-retirement benefit plans; (xi) income tax
valuation allowances and (xii) contingency and litiga-
tion reserves. Future events and their effects cannot
be predicted with certainty; accordingly, our account-
ing estimates require the exercise of judgment. The
accounting estimates used in the preparation of our
Consolidated Financial Statements will change as new
events occur, as more experience is acquired, as addi-
tional information is obtained and as our operating
environment changes. Actual results could differ from
those estimates.

The following table summarizes the more signifi-

cant charges that require management estimates:

Restructuring provisions 
and asset impairments

Amortization and impairment of  
goodwill and intangible assets

Provisions for receivables
Provisions for obsolete and 

excess inventory

Depreciation and obsolescence of 
equipment on operating leases

Depreciation of buildings 

and equipment

Year ended December 31,
2001
2002
2003

$176

$670

$715

35
224

78

271

299

143

364

108

99
353

115

408

341

249

168

120

15

94
506

242

657

402

179

99

130

247

net periodic benefit cost

Other post-retirement benefits – 

net periodic benefit cost
Deferred tax asset valuation 

allowance provisions

(16)

Changes in Estimates: In the ordinary course of
accounting for items discussed above, we make
changes in estimates as appropriate, and as we
become aware of circumstances surrounding those
estimates. Such changes and refinements in estima-
tion methodologies are reflected in reported results of
operations in the period in which the changes are
made and, if material, their effects are disclosed in the
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

New Accounting Standards and 
Accounting Changes:

Variable Interest Entities: In January 2003, the FASB
issued Interpretation No. 46, “Consolidation of
Variable Interest Entities, an interpretation of ARB 51”
(“FIN 46”). The primary objectives of FIN 46 were to
provide guidance on the identification of entities for

43

Certain reclassifications of prior year amounts

Amortization of capitalized 

have been made to conform to the current year 
presentation.

software

Pension benefits –  

which control is achieved through means other than
through voting rights and how to determine when and
which business enterprise should consolidate the vari-
able interest entity (“VIE”). We adopted FIN 46 on July
1, 2003 and, as a result, we began consolidating our
joint venture with De Lage Landen International BV
(“DLL”), our vendor financing partnership in the
Netherlands, effective July 1, 2003 as we were
deemed to be the primary beneficiary of the joint ven-
ture’s financial results. Prior to the adoption of FIN 46,
we accounted for our investment with DLL under the
equity method of accounting.

In December 2003, the FASB published a revision

to FIN 46 (“FIN 46R”), in part, to clarify certain of its
provisions. FIN 46R addressed substantive ownership
provisions related to consolidation. As a result of FIN
46R, we were required to deconsolidate three of our
subsidiary trusts— Capital Trust I, Capital Trust II and
Capital LLC. These trusts had previously issued manda-
torily redeemable preferred securities and entered into
loan agreements with the Company having similar
terms as the preferred securities. Specifically, FIN 46R
resulted in the holders of the preferred securities being
considered the primary beneficiaries of the trusts. As
such, we were no longer permitted to consolidate
these entities. We have therefore deconsolidated the
three trusts and reflected our obligations to them with-
in the balance sheet liability caption “Liability to sub-
sidiary trusts issuing preferred securities.” In addition
to deconsolidating these subsidiary trusts, the interest
on the loans, which was previously reported net of tax
as a component of “Minorities’ interests in earnings of
subsidiaries” in our Consolidated Statements of
Income, are now accounted for as interest expense
within “Other expenses, net”, with the tax effects pre-
sented within “Income taxes (benefits).” Accordingly,
$145, $145 and $64 in interest expense on loans
payable to the subsidiary trusts for the years ended
December 31, 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively, was
reflected as non-financing interest expense. The relat-
ed income tax effects were $56, $56 and $24, for the
years ended December 31, 2003, 2002, and 2001,
respectively. Financial statements for all periods pre-
sented have been revised to reflect this change. The
adoption of this interpretation had no impact on the
net income or earnings per share. In connection with
the adoption of FIN 46R, we also reclassified prior 
periods for the effects of the consolidation of DLL. 
The impact of consolidating DLL was immaterial for 
all periods presented.

Revenue Recognition: In November 2002, the
Emerging Issues Task Force (the “EITF”) reached a
consensus on Issue 00-21, “Revenue Arrangements
with Multiple Deliverables.” The EITF requires that the
deliverables must be divided into separate units of
accounting when the individual deliverables have
value to the customer on a stand-alone basis, when

44

there is objective and reliable evidence of the fair
value of the undelivered elements, and, if the arrange-
ment includes a general right to return the delivered
element, delivery or performance of the undelivered
element is considered probable. The relative fair value
of each unit should be determined and the total con-
sideration of the arrangement should be allocated
among the individual units based on their relative fair
value. With respect to bundled lease arrangements,
this guidance impacts the allocation of revenues to the
aggregate lease and non-lease deliverables. Lease
deliverables include executory costs, equipment and
interest, while non-lease deliverables consist of the
supplies and non-maintenance services component of
the bundled lease arrangements. The lease deliver-
ables must continue to be accounted for in accordance
with SFAS No. 13, consistent with our revenue recog-
nition policies. The guidance in this issue was effective
for revenue arrangements entered into after June 30,
2003. EITF 00-21 did not, and is not expected to, have a
material effect on our financial position or results of
operations. A full description of our revenue recogni-
tion policy associated with bundled contractual lease
arrangements appears below.

Guarantees: In November 2002, the FASB issued
Interpretation No. 45, “Guarantor’s Accounting and
Disclosure Requirements for Guarantees, Including
Indirect Guarantees of Indebtedness of Others” (“FIN
45”). This interpretation expanded the disclosure
requirements of guarantee obligations and requires
the guarantor to recognize a liability for the fair value
of the obligation assumed under a guarantee. The dis-
closure requirements of FIN 45 were effective as of
December 31, 2002. The recognition requirements of
FIN 45 were required to be applied prospectively to
guarantees issued or modified after December 31,
2002. Significant guarantees that we have entered are
disclosed in Note 15. The requirements of FIN 45 did
not have a material impact on our results of opera-
tions, financial position or liquidity.

Costs Associated with Exit or Disposal Activities: In
2002, the FASB issued SFAS No. 146, “Accounting for
Costs Associated with Exit or Disposal Activities”
(“SFAS No. 146”). This standard requires companies
to recognize costs associated with exit or disposal
activities when they are incurred, rather than at the
date of a commitment to an exit or disposal plan.
Examples of costs covered by the standard include
lease termination costs and certain employee sever-
ance costs that are associated with a restructuring,
plant closing, or other exit or disposal activity. We
adopted SFAS No. 146 in the fourth quarter of 2002.
Refer to Note 2 for further discussion.

Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets: Effective
January 1, 2002, we adopted Statement of Financial
Accounting Standards No. 142, “Goodwill and Other
Intangible Assets” (“SFAS No. 142”), whereby good-
will was no longer to be amortized, but instead is to be
tested for impairment annually or more frequently if
an event or circumstance indicates that an impairment
loss may have been incurred. In 2002, we recorded an
impairment charge of $63 as a cumulative effect of
change in accounting principle in the accompanying
Consolidated Statements of Income. Upon adoption of
SFAS No. 142, we reclassified $61 of intangible assets
to goodwill. Prior to adoption, goodwill and identifiable
intangible assets were amortized on a straight-line
basis over periods ranging from 5 to 40 years. Pro
forma net loss as adjusted for the exclusion of amorti-
zation expense of $59 for the year ended December
31, 2001 was $35 or $0.06 per share.

The following table presents the changes in the
carrying amount of goodwill, by operating segment,
for the years ended December 31, 2003 and 2002:

Production Office DMO Other

Total

$605

$710

$ 70

$121 $1,506

82
–
(4)
–

55
–
–
(5)

(3)
(63)
(1)
(3)

–
–
–
–

134
(63)
(5)
(8)

$683

$760

$  –

$121 $1,564

Balance at 
January 1, 2002

Foreign currency 
translation 
adjustment

Impairment charge
Divestitures
Other

Balance at 
December 31, 2002
Foreign currency 
translation 
adjustment

Balance at 
December 31, 2003

Revenue Recognition: In the normal course of busi-
ness, we generate revenue through the sale and rental
of equipment, service and supplies and income asso-
ciated with the financing of our equipment sales.
Revenue is recognized when earned. More specifically,
revenue related to sales of our products and services
is recognized as follows:

Equipment: Revenues from the sale of equipment,
including those from sales-type leases, are recognized
at the time of sale or at the inception of the lease, as
appropriate. For equipment sales that require us to
install the product at the customer location, revenue is
recognized when the equipment has been delivered to
and installed at the customer location. Sales of cus-
tomer installable products are recognized upon ship-
ment or receipt by the customer according to the
customer’s shipping terms. Revenues from equipment
under other leases and similar arrangements are
accounted for by the operating lease method and are
recognized as earned over the lease term, which is
generally on a straight-line basis.

Service: Service revenues are derived primarily from
maintenance contracts on our equipment sold to cus-
tomers and are recognized over the term of the con-
tracts. A substantial portion of our products are sold
with full service maintenance agreements for which
the customer typically pays a base service fee plus a
variable amount based on usage. As a consequence,
other than the product warranty obligations associat-
ed with certain of our low end products in the Office
segment, we do not have any significant product 
warranty obligations, including any obligations under
customer satisfaction programs.

88

67

–

3

158

$771

$827

$   –

$124 $1,722

Supplies: Supplies revenue generally is recognized
upon shipment or utilization by customer in accor-
dance with sales terms.

All intangible assets relate to the Office operating 

segment and were comprised of the following as 
of December 31, 2003:

Amorti-

Accu-
Gross mulated
zation Carrying Amorti-
Period Amount

Net
zation Amount

Installed customer base 17.5 years
25 years
Distribution network
7 years
Existing technology
7 years
Trademarks

$209
123
103
23

$458

$  45
20
56
12

$133

$164
103
47
11

$325

Amortization expense related to intangible assets
was $35, $36, and $40 for the years ended December
31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively, and is expected
to approximate $36 annually through 2008.

Revenue Recognition Under Bundled Arrangements:
We sell most of our products and services under bun-
dled contract arrangements, which contain multiple
deliverable elements. These contractual lease arrange-
ments typically include equipment, service, supplies
and financing components for which the customer
pays a single negotiated price for all elements. These
arrangements typically also include a variable compo-
nent for page volumes in excess of contractual mini-
mums, which are often expressed in terms of price per
page, which we refer to as the “cost per copy.” In a
typical bundled arrangement, our customer is quoted
a fixed minimum monthly payment for 1) the equip-
ment, 2) the associated services and other executory
costs, 3) the financing element and 4) frequently sup-
plies. The fixed minimum monthly payments are mul-
tiplied by the number of months in the contract term
to arrive at the total fixed minimum payments that the

45

customer is obligated to make (“fixed payments”)
over the lease term. The payments associated with
page volumes in excess of the minimums are contin-
gent on whether or not such minimums are exceeded
(“contingent payments”). The minimum contractual
committed copy volumes are typically negotiated to
equal the customer’s estimated copy volume at lease
inception. In applying our lease accounting methodol-
ogy, we consider the fixed payments for purposes of
allocating to the relative fair value elements of the
contract. We do not consider the contingent payments
for purposes of allocating to the elements of the con-
tract or recognizing revenue on the sale of the equip-
ment, given the inherent uncertainties as to whether
such amounts will ever be received. Contingent pay-
ments are recognized as revenue in the period when
the customer exceeds the minimum copy volumes
specified in the contract.

When separate prices are listed in multiple ele-
ment customer contracts, such prices may not be rep-
resentative of the fair values of those elements,
because the prices of the different components of the
arrangement may be modified through customer
negotiations, although the aggregate consideration
may remain the same. Revenues under bundled
arrangements are allocated based upon the estimated
fair values of each element (and for transactions
entered into after July 1, 2003, revenues are allocated
considering the relative fair values of the lease and
non-lease deliverables in accordance with EITF 00-21).
Our revenue allocation to the lease deliverables
begins by allocating revenues to the maintenance and
executory costs plus profit thereon. The remaining
amounts are allocated to the equipment and financing
elements. We perform extensive analyses of available
verifiable objective evidence of equipment fair value
based on cash selling prices during the applicable
period. The cash selling prices are compared to the
range of values included in our lease accounting sys-
tems. The range of cash selling prices must be reason-
ably consistent with the lease selling prices, taking
into account residual values that accrue to our benefit,
in order for us to determine that such lease prices are
indicative of fair value. Our pricing interest rates,
which are used to determine customer lease pay-
ments, are developed based upon a variety of factors
including local prevailing rates in the marketplace and
the customer’s credit history, industry and credit class.
Effective January 1, 2004, the pricing rates will be
reassessed quarterly based on changes in local pre-
vailing rates in the marketplace and will be adjusted to
the extent such rates vary by twenty-five basis points
or more, cumulatively, from the last rate in effect. The
pricing interest rates generally equal the implicit rates
within the leases, as corroborated by our comparisons
of cash to lease selling prices.

46

Revenue Recognition for Leases: Our accounting for
leases involves specific determinations under
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 13
“Accounting for Leases” (“SFAS No. 13”) which often
involve complex provisions and significant judgments.
The two primary criteria of SFAS No. 13 which we use
to classify transactions as sales-type or operating leas-
es are (1) a review of the lease term to determine if it is
equal to or greater than 75 percent of the economic
life of the equipment and (2) a review of the present
value of the minimum lease payments to determine if
they are equal to or greater than 90 percent of the fair
market value of the equipment at the inception of the
lease. We assess important criteria related to lease
classification, including whether collectibility of the
payments is reasonably predictable and whether there
are important uncertainties related to costs that we
have yet to incur with respect to the lease. In our opin-
ion, our sales-type lease portfolios contain only nor-
mal credit and collection risks and have no important
uncertainties with respect to future costs. Our leases
in our Latin America operations have historically been
recorded as operating leases because the recoverability
of the lease investment is deemed not to be predictable
at lease inception.

The critical elements that we consider with respect

to our lease accounting are the determination of the
economic life and the fair value of equipment, includ-
ing the residual value. Those elements are based upon
historical experience with all our products. For purpos-
es of determining the economic life, we consider the
most objective measure of historical experience to be
the original contract term, since most equipment is
returned by lessees at or near the end of the contract-
ed term. The economic life of most of our products is
five years since this represents the most frequent con-
tractual lease term for our principal products and only
a small percentage of our leases have original terms
longer than five years and there is generally no signifi-
cant after-market for our used equipment. We believe
that this is representative of the period during which
the equipment is expected to be economically usable,
with normal service, for the purpose for which it is
intended. We continually evaluate the economic life of
both existing and newly introduced products for pur-
poses of this determination. Residual values are estab-
lished at lease inception using estimates of fair value
at the end of the lease term. Our residual values are
established with due consideration to forecasted sup-
ply and demand for our various products, product
retirement and future product launch plans, end of
lease customer behavior, remanufacturing strategies,
used equipment markets, if any, competition and 
technological changes.

The vast majority of our leases that qualify as
sales-type are non-cancelable and include cancellation
penalties approximately equal to the full value of the
lease receivables. A portion of our business involves

sales to governmental units. Governmental units are
those entities that have statutorily defined funding or
annual budgets that are determined by their legislative
bodies. Certain of our governmental contracts may
have cancellation provisions or renewal clauses that
are required by law, such as 1) those dependant on 
fiscal funding outside of a governmental unit’s control,
2) those that can be cancelled if deemed in the taxpay-
er’s best interest or 3) those that must be renewed each
fiscal year, given limitations that may exist on entering
multi-year contracts that are imposed by statute. In
these circumstances and in accordance with the rele-
vant accounting literature, we carefully evaluate these
contracts to assess whether cancellation is remote
because of the existence of substantive economic
penalties upon cancellation or whether the renewal is
reasonably assured due to the existence of a bargain
renewal option. The evaluation of a lease agreement
with a renewal option includes an assessment as to
whether the renewal is reasonably assured based on
the intent of such governmental unit and pricing terms
as compared to those of short-term leases at lease
inception. We further ensure that the contract provi-
sions described above are offered only in instances
where required by law. Where such contract terms are
not legally required, we consider the arrangement to
be cancelable and account for it as an operating lease.
Aside from the initial lease of equipment to our
customers, we may enter subsequent transactions
with the same customer whereby we extend the term.
We evaluate the classification of lease extensions of
sales-type leases using the originally determined eco-
nomic life for each product. There may be instances
where we enter into lease extensions for periods that
are within the original economic life of the equipment.
These are accounted for as sales-type leases only
when the extensions occur in the last three months of
the lease term and they otherwise meet the appropri-
ate criteria of SFAS 13. All other lease extensions of
this type are accounted for as direct financing leases
or operating leases, as appropriate.

Cash and Cash Equivalents: Cash and cash equivalents
consist of cash on hand, including money-market
funds, and investments with original maturities of
three months or less.

Restricted Cash and Investments: Several of our 
borrowing and derivative contracts, as well as other
material contracts, require us to post cash collateral 
or maintain minimum cash balances in escrow. These
cash amounts are reported in our Consolidated
Balance Sheets within Other current assets or Other
long-term assets, depending on when the cash will 
be contractually released. At December 31, 2003 and
2002, such restricted cash amounts were as follows:

Escrow and cash collections 

related to secured borrowing 
arrangements

Escrow related to liability to trusts 

issuing preferred securities
Collateral related to swaps and 

letters of credit
Other restricted cash

Total

December 31,
2002

2003

$462

$349

79

155

74
114

77
97

$729

$678

Of these amounts, $386 and $263 were included in
Other current assets and $343 and $415 were included
in Other long-term assets, as of December 31, 2003
and 2002, respectively. The current amounts are
expected to be available for our use within one year.

Provisions for Losses on Uncollectible Receivables:
The provisions for losses on uncollectible trade and
finance receivables are determined principally on the
basis of past collection experience applied to ongoing
evaluations of our receivables and evaluations of the
default risks of repayment. Allowances for doubtful
accounts on accounts receivable balances were $218
and $282, as of December 31, 2003 and 2002, respec-
tively. Allowances for doubtful accounts on finance
receivables were $315 and $324 at December 31, 2003
and 2002, respectively.

Inventories: Inventories are carried at the lower of
average cost or market. Inventories also include equip-
ment that is returned at the end of the lease term.
Returned equipment is recorded at the lower of
remaining net book value or salvage value. Salvage
value consists of the estimated market value (general-
ly determined based on replacement cost) of the sal-
vageable component parts, which are expected to be
used in the remanufacturing process. We regularly
review inventory quantities and record a provision for
excess and/or obsolete inventory based primarily on
our estimated forecast of product demand, production
requirements and servicing commitments. Several fac-
tors may influence the realizability of our inventories,
including our decision to exit a product line, techno-
logical changes and new product development. The
provision for excess and/or obsolete raw materials and
equipment inventories is based primarily on near term
forecasts of product demand and include considera-
tion of new product introductions as well as changes
in remanufacturing strategies. The provision for
excess and/or obsolete service parts inventory is
based primarily on projected servicing requirements
over the life of the related equipment populations.

47

healthcare costs, the rate of future compensation
increases, and mortality, among others. Actual returns
on plan assets are not immediately recognized in our
income statement, due to the delayed recognition
requirement. In calculating the expected return on the
plan asset component of our net periodic pension
cost, we apply our estimate of the long term rate of
return to the plan assets that support our pension obli-
gations, after deducting assets that are specifically
allocated to Transitional Retirement Accounts (which
are accounted for based on specific plan terms).

For purposes of determining the expected return
on plan assets, we utilize a calculated value approach
in determining the value of the pension plan assets, as
opposed to a fair market value approach. The primary
difference between the two methods relates to system-
atic recognition of changes in fair value over time 
(generally two years) versus immediate recognition of
changes in fair value. Our expected rate of return on
plan assets is then applied to the calculated asset value
to determine the amount of the expected return on
plan assets to be used in the determination of the net
periodic pension cost. The calculated value approach
reduces the volatility in net periodic pension cost that
results from using the fair market value approach.

The difference between the actual return on plan
assets and the expected return on plan assets is added
to, or subtracted from, any cumulative differences that
arose in prior years. This amount is a component of
the unrecognized net actuarial (gain) loss and is sub-
ject to amortization to net periodic pension cost over
the remaining service lives of the employees partici-
pating in the pension plan.

Another significant assumption affecting our pen-

sion and post-retirement benefit obligations and the
net periodic pension and other post-retirement benefit
cost is the rate that we use to discount our future antic-
ipated benefit obligations. In estimating this rate, we
consider rates of return on high quality fixed-income
investments over the period to expected payment of
the pension and other post-retirement benefits.

Stock-Based Compensation: We do not recognize
compensation expense relating to employee stock
options because the exercise price is equal to the mar-
ket price at the date of grant. If we had elected to rec-
ognize compensation expense using a fair value
approach, and therefore determined the compensa-
tion based on the value as determined by the modified
Black-Scholes option pricing model, our pro forma
income (loss) and income (loss) per share would have
been as follows:

Land, Buildings and Equipment and Equipment on
Operating Leases: Land, buildings and equipment are
recorded at cost. Buildings and equipment are depreci-
ated over their estimated useful lives. Leasehold
improvements are depreciated over the shorter of the
lease term or the estimated useful life. Equipment on
operating leases is depreciated to estimated residual
value over the lease term. Depreciation is computed
using the straight-line method. Significant improve-
ments are capitalized and maintenance and repairs are
expensed. Refer to Notes 5 and 6 for further discussion.

Impairment of Long-Lived Assets: We review the
recoverability of our long-lived assets, including build-
ings, equipment, internal-use software and other
intangible assets, when events or changes in circum-
stances occur that indicate that the carrying value of
the asset may not be recoverable. The assessment of
possible impairment is based on our ability to recover
the carrying value of the asset from the expected
future pre-tax cash flows (undiscounted and without
interest charges) of the related operations. If these
cash flows are less than the carrying value of such
asset, an impairment loss is recognized for the differ-
ence between estimated fair value and carrying value.
Our primary measure of fair value is based on dis-
counted cash flows. The measurement of impairment
requires management to make estimates of these cash
flows related to long-lived assets, as well as other fair
value determinations.

Research and Development Expenses: Research and
development costs are expensed as incurred.

Pension and Post-Retirement Benefit Obligations: We
sponsor pension plans in various forms in several
countries covering substantially all employees who
meet eligibility requirements. Post-retirement benefit
plans cover primarily U.S. employees for retirement
medical costs. As required by existing accounting
rules, we employ a delayed recognition feature in
measuring the costs and obligations of pension and
post-retirement benefit plans. This requires changes in
the benefit obligations and changes in the value of
assets set aside to meet those obligations, to be rec-
ognized, not as they occur, but systematically and
gradually over subsequent periods. All changes are
ultimately recognized, except to the extent they may
be offset by subsequent changes. At any point,
changes that have been identified and quantified
await subsequent accounting recognition as net cost
components and as liabilities or assets.

Several statistical and other factors that attempt to

anticipate future events are used in calculating the
expense, liability and asset values related to our pen-
sion and post-retirement benefit plans. These factors
include assumptions we make about the discount rate,
expected return on plan assets, rate of increase in

48

Net income (loss) – as reported
Deduct: Total stock-based 

employee compensation 
expense determined under  
fair value based method  
for all awards, net of tax

Net income (loss) – pro forma

Basic EPS – as reported
Basic EPS – pro forma
Diluted EPS – as reported
Diluted EPS – pro forma

2003

$ 360

2002

2001

$    91

$   (94)

(85)

(83)

(93)

$ 275

$0.38
0.27
$0.36
0.25

$      8

$ (187)

$ 0.02
(0.09)
$ 0.02
(0.09)

$(0.15)
(0.28)
$(0.15)
(0.28)

The pro forma periodic compensation expense
amounts may not be representative of future amounts
since the estimated fair value of stock options is amor-
tized to expense ratably over the vesting period, and
additional options may be granted in future years. As
reflected in the pro forma amounts in the previous
table, the weighted-average fair value of each option
granted in 2003, 2002 and 2001 was $5.39, $6.34 and
$2.40, respectively. The fair value of each option was
estimated on the date of grant using the following
weighted average assumptions:

Risk-free interest rate
Expected life in years
Expected price volatility
Expected dividend yield

2003

2002

2001

3.3%
7.2
66.2%
–

4.8%
6.5
61.5%
–

5.1%
6.5
51.4%
2.7%

Foreign Currency Translation: The functional currency
for most foreign operations is the local currency. Net
assets are translated at current rates of exchange, and

income, expense and cash flow items are translated at
the average exchange rate for the year. The translation
adjustments are recorded in Accumulated Other
Comprehensive Income. The U.S. dollar is used as the
functional currency for certain subsidiaries that conduct
their business in U.S. dollars or operate in hyperinfla-
tionary economies. A combination of current and his-
torical exchange rates is used in remeasuring the local
currency transactions of these subsidiaries, and the
resulting exchange adjustments are included in income.
Aggregate foreign currency losses were $11 and $77 in
2003 and 2002, respectively, and gains were $29 in 
2001 and are included in Other expenses, net in the
accompanying Consolidated Statements of Income.

Note 2 – Restructuring Programs

We have engaged in a series of restructuring programs
related to downsizing our employee base, exiting cer-
tain businesses, outsourcing certain internal functions
and engaging in other actions designed to reduce our
cost structure and improve productivity. Management
continues to evaluate the business and, therefore,
there may be supplemental provisions for new plan 
initiatives as well as changes in estimates to amounts
previously recorded, as payments are made or actions
are completed. Asset impairment charges were also
incurred in connection with these restructuring actions
for those assets made obsolete or redundant as a
result of these programs. The restructuring and asset
impairment charges in the Consolidated Statements of
Income totaled $176, $670 and $715 in 2003, 2002 and
2001, respectively. Detailed information related to
restructuring program activity during the three years
ended December 31, 2003 is outlined below.

Restructuring Activity

Ending Balance December 31, 2000

Provision
Reversals of prior accruals
Charges against reserve and currency

Ending Balance December 31, 2001

Provision
Reversals of prior accruals
Charges against reserve and currency

Ending Balance December 31, 2002

Provision
Reversals of prior accruals
Charges against reserve and currency

Ending Balance December 31, 2003

Fourth
Quarter
2002/2003
Program

$     –

–
–
–

$     –

357
–
(71)

$ 286

193
(16)
(284)

$ 179

Turnaround
Program

SOHO

1998/ 2000
Programs

$   71

401
(26)
(223)

$ 223

286
(33)
(345)

$ 131

11
(13)
(87)

$   –

101
(26)
(52)

$ 23

–
–
(17)

$   6

–
–
(6)

$ 256

85
(25)
(280)

$   36

5
–
(41)

$     –

–
–
–

$   42

$   –

$     –

TOTAL

$ 327

587
(77)
(555)

$ 282

648
(33)
(474)

$ 423

204
(29)
(377)

$ 221

49

Reconciliation to 
Statements of Income

Restructuring provision
Restructuring reversal
Asset impairment charges

Restructuring and asset 
impairment charges

For the year ended
December 31,
2002

2001

2003

$204
(29)
1(1)

$648
(33)
55(2)

$587
(77)
205(3)

Initial Provision
Charges against reserve

$176

$670

$715

Balance at December 31, 2002

Lease
Severance Cancella- 
tion and

and 
Related
Costs

$ 312
(71)

$ 241

186
(15)
(269)

Other  
Costs

$ 45
–

$ 45

7
(1)
(15)

Total

$ 357
(71)

$ 286

193
(16)
(284)

Provisions
Reversals
Charges

Balance at December 31, 2003

$ 143

$ 36

$ 179

The following tables summarize the total amount

of costs expected to be incurred in connection with
these restructuring programs and the cumulative
amount incurred as of December 31, 2003:

Segment Reporting:

Net

Cumulative
amount
incurred

amount Cumulative
amount
incurred
incurred
for the  
as of year ended

December  December December
31, 2003 
31, 2003

31, 2002

Total
as of expected
to be
incurred*

Production
Office
DMO
Other

Total Provisions

$146
102
54
100

$402

$ 82
66
13
16

$177

$228
168
67
116

$579

$243
178
67
121

$609

* The total amount of $609 represents the cumulative amount incurred

through December 31, 2003 plus additional expected restructuring charges
of $30 related to initiatives identified to date but not yet recognized in the
Consolidated Financial Statements. The expected restructuring provisions
primarily relate to additional pension settlement costs.

Major Cost Reporting:

Net

Cumulative
amount
incurred

amount Cumulative
amount
incurred
incurred
for the  
as of year ended

December  December December
31, 2003 
31, 2003

31, 2002

Total
as of expected
to be
incurred*

Severance and 
related costs
Lease cancellation 
and other costs
Asset impairments

$312

$171

$483

$509

45
45

6
–

51
45

55
45

Total Provisions

$402

$177

$579

$609

Other Restructuring Programs: The following is a sum-
mary of past restructuring programs undertaken by
the Company:

(1) Asset impairment charges related to the Turnaround Program.
(2) Asset impairment charges consisted of $45 and $10 for the Fourth Quarter

2002 Program and SOHO, respectively.

(3) Asset impairment charges consisted of $28, $164 and $13 for the
Turnaround Program, SOHO and 2000 Program, respectively.

Reconciliation to
Statements of Cash Flows

Charges to reserve
Pension curtailment, special 

termination benefits 
and settlements

Effects of foreign currency 

and other noncash

For the year ended
December 31,
2002

2001

2003

$(377)

$(474)

$(555)

33

(1)

59

23

21

50

Cash payments for restructurings

$(345)

$(392)

$(484)

Restructuring Programs – Fourth Quarter 2002 and
2003: As more fully discussed in Note 1, on October 1,
2002, we adopted the provisions of SFAS No. 146.
During the fourth quarter of 2002, we announced a
worldwide restructuring program and subsequently
recorded a provision of $402. The provision consisted
of $312 for severance and related costs, $45 of costs
associated with lease terminations and future rental
obligations, net of estimated future sublease rents and
$45 for asset impairments. The severance and related
costs were related to the elimination of approximately
4,700 positions worldwide. As of December 31, 2003,
substantially all of the affected employees had been
separated under the program. During 2003, we provid-
ed an additional $177 for restructuring programs, net
of reversals of $16 related to changes in estimates for
severance costs from previously recorded actions. The
additional provision consisted of $153 primarily related
to the elimination of over 2,000 positions worldwide,
$33 for pension settlements and post-retirement med-
ical benefit curtailments associated with prior sever-
ance actions and $7 for lease terminations. The reserve
balance for these Restructuring Programs at December
31, 2003 was $179 and is summarized as follows:

50

• Turnaround Program: The Turnaround Program was
initiated in October 2000 to reduce costs, improve
operations, transition customer equipment financing
to third-party vendors and sell certain assets. This pro-
gram included the outsourcing of certain Office oper-
ating segment manufacturing to Flextronics, as
discussed in Note 3. Overall, approximately 11,200
positions were eliminated under this program.

• SOHO Disengagement: In 2001, we commenced a
separate restructuring program associated with the
disengagement from our worldwide small office/home
office (“SOHO”) business. The program included pro-
visions for the elimination of approximately 1,200
positions worldwide by the end of 2001, the closing of
facilities and the write down of certain assets to net
realizable value.

• March 2000/April 1998 Programs: These programs
were likewise initiated to reduce overall costs and
included reductions in workforce as well as the consol-
idation of facilities on a worldwide basis. Overall,
approximately 14,200 positions were eliminated 
under these programs.

Reversals of prior period charges were recorded

for these programs during the three-year period
ended December 31, 2003 primarily as a result of
changes in estimates associated with employee 
severance and related costs.

Note 3 – Divestitures and Other Sales

During the three years ended December 31, 2003, the
following transactions occurred:

Xerox Engineering Systems: In the second quarter 2003,
we sold our XES subsidiaries in France and Germany
for a nominal amount and recognized a loss of $12.

South Africa: In the second quarter 2003, we sold our
interests in our South African affiliate for proceeds of
$29 and recognized a gain of $4.

Nigeria: In December 2002, we sold our remaining
investment in Nigeria for a nominal amount and rec-
ognized a loss of $35, primarily representing cumula-
tive translation adjustment losses which were
previously unrealized.

Licensing Agreement: In September 2002, we signed a
license agreement with a third party, related to a
nonexclusive license for the use of certain of our exist-
ing patents. In October 2002, we received proceeds of
$50 and granted the license. We have no continuing
obligation or other commitments to the third party
and recorded the income associated with this transac-
tion as revenue in Service, outsourcing and rentals in
the accompanying Consolidated Statement of Income.

Katun Corporation: In July 2002, we sold our 22 per-
cent investment in Katun Corporation, a supplier of
aftermarket copier/printer parts and supplies, for net
proceeds of $67. This sale resulted in a pre-tax gain of
$12, which is included in Other expenses, net, in the
accompanying Consolidated Statements of Income.
After-tax, the sale was essentially break-even, as the
taxable basis of Katun was lower than our carrying
value on the sale date resulting in a high rate of
income tax.

Italy Leasing Business: In April 2002, we sold our leas-
ing business in Italy to a company now owned by GE
for $200 in cash plus the assumption of $20 of debt.
This sale is part of an agreement under which GE, as
successor, provides ongoing, exclusive equipment
financing to our customers in Italy. The total pre-tax
loss on this transaction, which is included in Other
expenses, net, in the accompanying Consolidated
Statements of Income, was $27 primarily related to
recognition of cumulative translation adjustment loss-
es and final sale contingency settlements.

Prudential Insurance Company Common Stock: In the
first quarter of 2002, we sold common stock of
Prudential Insurance Company associated with that
company’s demutualization. In connection with this
sale, we recognized a pre-tax gain of $19 that is includ-
ed in Other Expenses, net, in the accompanying
Consolidated Statements of Income.

Delphax: In December 2001, we sold Delphax Systems
and Delphax Systems, Inc. (“Delphax”) to Check
Technology Canada LTD and Check Technology
Corporation for $16. The transaction was essentially
break-even. Delphax designs, manufactures and sup-
plies high-speed electron beam imaging digital print-
ing systems and related parts, supplies and services.

Nordic Leasing Business: In April 2001, we sold our
leasing businesses in four Nordic countries to a com-
pany now owned by GE, for $352 in cash and retained
interests in certain finance receivables for total pro-
ceeds of approximately $370 which approximated
book value. These sales are part of an agreement
under which that company will provide ongoing,
exclusive equipment financing to our customers in
those countries.

Fuji Xerox Interest: In March 2001, we sold half of our
ownership interest in Fuji Xerox to Fuji Photo Film Co.,
Ltd (“Fuji Film”) for $1.3 billion in cash. In connection
with the sale, we recorded a pre-tax gain of $773.
Under the agreement, Fuji Film’s ownership interest in
Fuji Xerox increased from 50 percent to 75 percent.
Our ownership interest decreased to 25 percent and
we retain significant rights as a minority shareholder.
We have product distribution and technology agree-

51

ments that ensure that both parties have access to
each other’s portfolio of patents, technology and prod-
ucts. Fuji Xerox continues to provide products to us as
well as collaborate with us on R&D.

Flextronics Manufacturing Outsourcings: In the fourth
quarter of 2001, we entered into purchase and supply
agreements with Flextronics, a global electronics manu-
facturing services company. Under the agreements,
Flextronics purchased related inventory, property and
equipment. Pursuant to the purchase agreement, we
sold our operations in Toronto, Canada; Aguascalientes,
Mexico, Penang, Malaysia, Venray, The Netherlands
and Resende, Brazil to Flextronics in a series of transac-
tions, which were completed in 2002. In total, approxi-
mately 4,100 Xerox employees in certain of these
operations transferred to Flextronics. Total proceeds
from the sales in 2002 and 2001 were $167, plus the
assumption of certain liabilities, representing a premi-
um over book value. The premium is being amortized
over the life of the supply contract.

Under the supply agreement, Flextronics manufac-
tures and supplies equipment and components, includ-
ing electronic components, for the Office segment of
our business. This represents approximately 50 per-
cent of our overall worldwide manufacturing opera-
tions. The initial term of the Flextronics supply
agreement is five years subject to our right to extend
for two years. Thereafter it will automatically be
renewed for one-year periods, unless either party
elects to terminate the agreement. We have agreed to
purchase from Flextronics most of our requirements
for certain products in specified product families. We
also must purchase certain electronic components
from Flextronics so long as Flextronics meets certain
pricing requirements. Flextronics must acquire inven-
tory in anticipation of meeting our forecasted require-
ments and must maintain sufficient manufacturing
capacity to satisfy such forecasted requirements.
Under certain circumstances, we may become obligat-
ed to repurchase inventory that remains unused for
more than 180 days, becomes obsolete or upon termi-
nation of the supply agreement. Our remaining manu-
facturing operations are primarily located in Rochester,
NY for our high end production products and consum-
ables and Wilsonville, OR for consumable supplies and
components for the Office segment products.

Note 4 – Receivables, Net

Finance Receivables: Finance receivables result from
installment arrangements and sales-type leases aris-
ing from the marketing of our equipment. These
receivables are typically collateralized by a security
interest in the underlying assets. The components of
Finance receivables, net at December 31, 2003 and
2002 follow:

52

Gross receivables
Unearned income
Unguaranteed residual values
Allowance for doubtful accounts

Finance receivables, net
Less: Billed portion of finance 

receivables, net

Current portion of finance 

receivables not billed, net

2003

2002

$10,599
(1,651)
180
(315)

$10,685
(1,628)
272
(324)

8,813

9,005

(461)

(564)

(2,981)

(3,088)

Amounts due after one year, net

$  5,371

$  5,353

Contractual maturities of our gross finance receiv-

ables subsequent to December 31, 2003 follow
(including those already billed of $461):

2004

2005

2006

2007

$4,206

$2,862

$1,948

$1,098

There-
after

Total

$84 $10,599

2008

$401

Our experience has shown that a portion of these

finance receivables will be prepaid prior to maturity.
Accordingly, the preceding schedule of contractual
maturities should not be considered a forecast of
future cash collections.

Vendor Financing Initiatives: In 2002, we completed an
agreement (the “Loan Agreement”), under which GE
Vendor Financial Services, a subsidiary of GE, became
the primary equipment financing provider in the U.S.,
through monthly fundings of our new lease origina-
tions. In March 2003, the agreement was amended to
allow for the inclusion of state and local governmental
contracts in future fundings.

Under the agreement, GE is expected to fund a
significant portion of new U.S. lease originations at
over-collateralization rates, which will vary over time,
but are expected to approximate 10 percent at the
inception of each funding. The securitizations are sub-
ject to interest rates calculated at each monthly loan
occurrence at yield rates consistent with average rates
for similar market based transactions. Refer to Note 10
for further information on interest rates. The funds
received under this agreement are recorded as
secured borrowings and the associated receivables
are included in our Consolidated Balance Sheet. GE’s
funding commitment is not subject to our credit rat-
ings. There are no credit rating defaults that could
impair future funding under this agreement. This
agreement contains cross default provisions related to
certain financial covenants contained in the 2003
Credit Facility and other significant debt facilities. Any
default would impair our ability to receive subsequent
funding until the default was cured or waived but
does not accelerate previous borrowings. However, in
the event of a default, we could be replaced as the
maintenance service provider for the associated
equipment under lease.

During 2003, we entered into similar long-term
lease funding arrangements with GE in both the U.K.
and Canada. These agreements contain similar terms
and conditions as those contained in the U.S. Loan
Agreement with respect to funding conditions and
covenants. The final funding date for all facilities is
currently December 2010. The following is a summary
of the facility amounts for the arrangements with GE
in these countries.

Facility Amount

Maximum Facility Amount(1)

U.S.
U.K.

Canada

$5 billion
£400 million 
(U.S. $711)
Cdn. $850 million
(U.S. $657)

$8 billion
£600 million
(U.S. $1.1 billion)
Cdn. $2 billion 
(U.S. $1.5 billion)

(1) subject to mutual agreement by the parties

France Secured Borrowings: In July 2003, we securi-
tized receivables of $443, previously funded under a
364-day warehouse financing facility established in
December 2002 with subsidiaries of Merrill Lynch,
with a three-year public secured financing arrange-
ment. In addition, we established a new warehouse
financing facility to fund future lease originations in
France. This facility can provide funding for new lease
originations up to €350 million (U.S. $439), outstand-
ing at any time, and balances may be securitized
through a similar public offering within two years.

The Netherlands Secured Borrowings: Beginning in
the second half of 2002, we received a series of fund-
ings through our consolidated joint venture with De
Lage Landen International BV (DLL) from DLL’s parent,
De Lage Landen Ireland Company. The fundings are
secured by our lease receivables in The Netherlands
which were transferred to DLL. In addition, DLL also
became our primary equipment financing provider in
the Netherlands for all new lease originations. In the
fourth quarter of 2003, DLL expanded its operations 
to include Spain and Belgium. As more fully discussed
in Note 1, our joint venture with DLL has been 
consolidated.

Germany Secured Borrowings: In May 2002, we
entered into an agreement to transfer part of our
financing operations in Germany to GE. In conjunction
with this transaction, we received loans from GE
secured by lease receivables in Germany. As part of
the transaction we transferred leasing employees to a
GE entity which will also finance certain new leasing
business in the future. We currently consolidate this
joint venture since we retain substantive rights related
to the borrowings.

The following table shows finance receivables and

related secured debt as of December 31, 2003 and 2002:

December 31, 2003    December 31,2002

Finance
Receiv-

Finance
Receiv-

ables,  Secured
Debt

Net

ables, Secured
Debt

Net

GE secured loans:
United States
Canada
United Kingdom
Germany

Total GE encumbered 

finance 
receivables, net

Merrill Lynch Loan – 

France

Asset-backed notes – 

France

DLL – Netherlands, 

Spain, and Belgium(1)
U.S. asset-backed notes
Other U.S. securitizations

Total encumbered 

finance 
receivables, net

Unencumbered finance 

$2,939
528
719
114

$2,598
440
570
84

$2,430
347
691
95

$2,323
319
529
95

4,300

3,692

3,563

3,266

138

429

335
–
–

92

413

377

364

277
–
–

–

–

113
247
101

111
139
7

5,202

$4,425

4,437

$3,900

receivables, net

3,611

4,568

Total finance 

receivables, net

$8,813

$9,005

(1) These represent the loans received by our consolidated joint venture with

DLL. De Lage Landen Ireland Company is the lender of record.

As of December 31, 2003, $5,202 of Finance receiv-

ables, net are held as collateral in various trusts as secu-
rity for the borrowings noted above. Total outstanding
debt secured by these receivables at December 31, 2003
was $4,425. The trusts are consolidated in our financial
statements. Although the transferred assets are included
in our total assets, the assets of the trusts are not avail-
able to satisfy any of our other obligations.

Sales of Accounts Receivable: In 2000, we established
two revolving accounts receivable securitization facili-
ties in the U.S. and Canada aggregating $330. The
facilities enabled us to sell, on an ongoing basis, undi-
vided interests in a portion of our accounts receivable
in exchange for cash. The undivided interest sold
under the U.S. trade receivable securitization facility
amounted to $290 at December 31, 2001. In May 2002,
a credit rating agency downgrade caused a termina-
tion event under our U.S. trade receivable securitiza-
tion facility. We continued to sell receivables into the
U.S trade receivable securitization facility pending
renegotiation of the facility as a result of this termina-
tion event. In October 2002, the facility was terminated
and no additional receivables were sold to the facility.
As a result, in October, the counter-party received $231
of collections from the pool of the then-existing receiv-

53

ables within the facility, which represented their
remaining undivided interest balance. No new receiv-
ables were purchased by the counterparty and we
have no further obligations as such facility has been
terminated. The Canadian accounts receivable facility
had undivided interests of $36 at December 31, 2001. 
It was impacted by a downgrade in our credit rating in
February 2002, which led to a similar termination
event. The Canadian accounts receivable facility was
not renegotiated and the balance of the undivided
interests was fully settled through collections in the
first quarter of 2002.

Note 5 – Inventories and Equipment 
on Operating Leases, Net

The components of inventories at December 31, 2003
and 2002 were as follows:

Finished goods
Work in process
Raw materials

Total inventories

2003

2002

$   911
74
167

$   970
67
194

$1,152

$1,231

Equipment on operating leases and similar
arrangements consists of our equipment rented to
customers and depreciated to estimated salvage value
at the end of the lease term. The transfer of equipment
on operating leases from our inventories is presented
in our Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows in the
operating activities section as a non-cash adjustment.
Equipment on operating leases and the related accu-
mulated depreciation at December 31, 2003 and 2002
were as follows:

Equipment on operating leases
Less: Accumulated depreciation
Equipment on operating leases, net

2003

2002

$ 1,795
(1,431)
$   364

$ 2,002
(1,552)
$    450

Depreciable lives generally vary from three to four
years consistent with our planned and historical usage
of the equipment subject to operating leases.
Depreciation and obsolescence expense was $271,
$408, and $657 for the years ended December 31,
2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively. Our equipment
operating lease terms vary, generally from 12 to 36
months. Scheduled minimum future rental revenues
on operating leases with original terms of one year or
longer are:

2004

$471

2005

$228

2006

$120

2007

Thereafter

$43

$22

Total contingent rentals on operating leases, con-
sisting principally of usage charges in excess of mini-
mum contracted amounts, for the years ended

54

December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 amounted to $235,
$187 and $235, respectively.

Note 6 – Land, Buildings and
Equipment, Net

The components of land, buildings and equipment,
net at December 31, 2003 and 2002 were as follows:

Land
Buildings and building 

equipment

Leasehold improvements
Plant machinery
Office furniture and 

equipment

Other
Construction in progress

Subtotal
Less: Accumulated 

depreciation

Land, buildings and 
equipment, net

Estimated
Useful Lives
(Years)

25 to 50
Lease term
5 to 12

3 to 15
4 to 20

2003

2002

$      56

$      54

1,194
383
1,588

1,081
74
114

4,490

1,077
412
1,551

1,057
107
129

4,387

(2,663)

(2,630)

$ 1,827

$ 1,757

Depreciation expense was $299, $341, and $402 for

the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001,
respectively. We lease certain land, buildings and
equipment, substantially all of which are accounted for
as operating leases. Total rent expense under operat-
ing leases for the years ended December 31, 2003,
2002 and 2001 amounted to $287, $299, and $332,
respectively. Future minimum operating lease commit-
ments that have remaining non-cancelable lease terms
in excess of one year at December 31, 2003 follow:

2004

$235

2005

$190

2006

$148

2007

$118

2008 Thereafter

$96

$383

In certain circumstances, we sublease space not
currently required in operations. Future minimum sub-
lease income under leases with non-cancelable terms
in excess of one year amounted to $45 at December
31, 2003.

In 2001, we extended our information technology
contract with Electronic Data Systems Corp. (“EDS”)
for five years through June 30, 2009. Services to be
provided under this contract include support of global
mainframe system processing, application mainte-
nance, desktop and helpdesk support, voice and data
network management and server management. There
are no minimum payments due EDS under the con-
tract. Payments to EDS, which are recorded in selling,
administrative and general expenses, were $340, $385,
and $445 for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002
and 2001, respectively.

In December 2003, STHQ Realty LLC was formed

to finance the acquisition of the Company’s headquar-
ters in Stamford, Connecticut. While the assets and lia-
bilities of this special purpose entity are included in
the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements,
STHQ Realty LLC is a bankruptcy-remote separate
legal entity. As a result, its assets of $44 at December
31, 2003, are not available to satisfy the debts and
other obligations of the Company.

Note 7 – Investments in Affiliates, 
at Equity

Investments in corporate joint ventures and other
companies in which we generally have a 20 to 50 per-
cent ownership interest at December 31, 2003 and
2002 were as follows:

Fuji Xerox (1)
Investment in subsidiary trusts 
issuing preferred securities

Other investments

2003

$556

69
19

2002

$563

66
66

Investments in affiliates, at equity

$644

$695

(1) Fuji Xerox is headquartered in Tokyo and operates in Japan and other

areas of the Pacific Rim, Australia and New Zealand. We previously sold
half our interest in Fuji Xerox to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. in March 2001.
Our investment in Fuji Xerox of $556 at December 31, 2003, differs from
our implied 25 percent interest in the underlying net assets, or $623, due
primarily to our deferral of gains resulting from sales of assets by us to
Fuji Xerox, partially offset by goodwill related to the Fuji Xerox investment
established at the time we acquired our remaining 20 percent of Xerox
Limited from The Rank Group (plc). Such gains would only be realizable if
Fuji Xerox sold a portion of the assets we previously sold to it or if we
were to sell a portion of our ownership interest in Fuji Xerox.

Our equity in net income of our unconsolidated
affiliates for the three years ended December 31, 2003
was as follows:

Fuji Xerox
Other investments

Total

2003

2002

2001

$41
17

$58

$37
17

$54

$47
6

$53

Equity in net income of Fuji Xerox is affected by

certain adjustments to reflect the deferral of profit
associated with intercompany sales. These adjustments
may result in recorded equity income that is different
than that implied by our 25 percent ownership interest.
Condensed financial data of Fuji Xerox as of and

for the three calendar years ended December 31, 2003
follow:

Summary of Operations
Revenues
Costs and expenses

Income before income taxes
Income taxes
Minorities’ interests

Net income

Balance Sheet Data
Assets :
Current assets
Long-term assets

Total assets

Liabilities and 

Shareholders’ Equity:

Current liabilities
Long-term debt
Other long-term liabilities
Minorities’ interests in equity 

of subsidiaries
Shareholders’ equity

Total liabilities and 

2003

2002

2001

$8,430
8,011

$7,539
7,181

$7,684
7,316

419
194
34

358
134
36

368
167
35

$   191

$   188

$   166

$3,273
4,766

$2,976
3,862

$2,783
3,455

$8,039

$6,838

$6,238

$2,594
443
2,391

$2,152
868
1,084

$2,242
796
632

118
2,493

227
2,507

201
2,367

shareholders’ equity

$8,039

$6,838

$6,238

We have a technology agreement with Fuji Xerox

whereby we receive royalty payments and rights to
access their patent portfolio in exchange for access 
to our patent portfolio. In 2003, 2002 and 2001, we
earned royalty revenues under this agreement of
$110, $99 and $101, respectively. We also have
arrangements with Fuji Xerox whereby we purchase
inventory from and sell inventory to Fuji Xerox.
Pricing of the transactions under these arrangements
is based upon negotiations conducted at arm’s length.
Certain of these inventory purchases and sales are the
result of mutual research and development arrange-
ments. Our purchase commitments with Fuji Xerox
are in the normal course of business and typically
have a lead time of three months. Purchases from 
and sales to Fuji Xerox for the three years ended
December 31, 2003 were as follows:

Sales
Purchases

2003

$129
$871

2002

$113
$727

2001

$132
$598

In addition to the payments described above, 
in 2003 and 2002, we paid Fuji Xerox $33 and $20,
respectively, and in 2003 and 2002 Fuji Xerox paid us
$9 and $10, respectively, for unique research and
development.

Note 8 – Segment Reporting

Our reportable segments are consistent with how we
manage the business and view the markets we serve.
Our reportable segments are Production, Office,
Developing Markets Operations (“DMO”) and Other.
The accounting policies of all of our segments are the

55

same as those described in the summary of significant
accounting policies included in Note 1.

cial customers as well as government, education and
other public sector customers.

The Production segment includes black and white

products which operate at speeds over 90 pages per
minute and color products which operate at speeds
over 40 pages per minute. Products include the
DocuTech, DocuPrint, Xerox 1010 and Xerox 2101 and
DocuColor families, as well as older technology light-
lens products. These products are sold, predominantly
through direct sales channels in North America and
Europe, to Fortune 1000, graphic arts, government,
education and other public sector customers.

The Office segment includes black and white prod-

ucts which operate at speeds up to 90 pages per
minute and color devices up to 40 pages per minute.
Products include our family of Document Centre digi-
tal multifunction products and our new suite of
CopyCentre, WorkCentre, and WorkCentre Pro digital
multifunction systems, DocuColor color multifunction
products, color laser, solid ink and monochrome laser
desktop printers, digital and light-lens copiers and fac-
simile products. These products are sold through
direct and indirect sales channels in North America
and Europe to global, national and mid-size commer-

The DMO segment includes our operations in
Latin America, the Middle East, India, Eurasia, Russia
and Africa. This segment includes sales of products
that are typical to the aforementioned segments, how-
ever, management serves and evaluates these mar-
kets on an aggregate geographic basis, rather than on
a product basis.

The segment classified as Other, includes several
units, none of which met the thresholds for separate
segment reporting. This group primarily includes
Xerox Supplies Group (predominantly paper), Small
Office/Home Office (“SOHO”), Xerox Engineering
Systems, Xerox Technology Enterprises and consult-
ing services, royalty and license revenues. Other seg-
ment profit (loss) includes the operating results from
these entities, other less significant businesses, our
equity income from Fuji Xerox, and certain costs
which have not been allocated to the Production,
Office and DMO segments including non-financing
interest and other corporate costs.

Selected financial information for our operating
segments for each of the three years ended December
31, 2003 was as follows:

Production

Office

DMO

Other

Total

2003 (1)
Information about profit or loss:

Revenues
Finance income

Total segment revenues

Interest expense (2)
Segment profit (loss) (3)(4)
Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates

2002 (1)
Information about profit or loss:

Revenues
Finance income

Total segment revenues

Interest expense (2)

Segment profit (loss) (3)(4)
Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates

2001 (1)
Information about profit or loss:

Revenues
Finance income

Total segment revenues

Interest expense (2)
Segment profit (loss) (3)(4)
Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates

$4,171
376

$4,547

$   121
422
–

$4,128
394

$4,522

$   157
450
–

$4,288
439

$4,727

$   217
372
–

$7,108
595

$7,703

$   181
753
1

$6,940
601

$7,541

$   223
621
–

$7,356
661

$8,017

$   304
427
–

$1,607
9

$1,616

$     34
151
6

$1,742
16

$1,758

$     17
91
5

$2,000
26

$2,026

$     48
(97)
4

$1,818
17

$1,835

$   548
(411)
51

$2,039
(11)

$2,028

$   499
(329)
49

$2,235
3

$2,238

$   432
(398)
49

$14,704
997

$15,701

$    884
915
58

$14,849
1,000

$15,849

$     896
833
54

$15,879
1,129

$17,008

$  1,001
304
53

(1) Asset information on a segment basis is not disclosed as this information is not separately identified and internally reported to our chief executive officer.

(2) Interest expense includes equipment financing interest as well as non-financing interest, which is a component of Other expenses, net.

(3) Other segment profit (loss) includes net corporate expenses of $529, $362 and $130 for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.

Corporate expenses include interest expense associated with our liability to subsidiary trusts issuing preferred securities (see Note 14).

(4) Depreciation and amortization expense is recorded in cost of sales, research and development expenses and selling, administrative and general expenses and
is included in the segment profit (loss) above. This information is neither identified nor internally reported to our chief executive officer. These expenses are
recorded by our operating units in the accounting records based on individual assessments as to how the related assets are used. The separate identification
of this information for purposes of segment disclosure is impracticable, as it is not readily available and the cost to develop it would be excessive.

56

The following is a reconciliation of segment profit 

to total company pre-tax income (loss):

Years ended December 31,

Total segment profit
Unallocated items:

Restructuring and asset 
impairment charges

Gain on early extinguishment 

2003

$ 915

2002

$ 833

2001

$ 304

(176)

(670)

(715)

of debt

–

Restructuring related inventory

write-down charges
Provision for litigation
Gain on sale of Fuji Xerox interest
Other expenses

–
(239)
–
(6)

–

(2)
–
–
(3)

63

(42)
–
773
(2)

Allocated item:

Equity in net income of 

unconsolidated affiliates

(58)

(54)

(53)

Pre-tax income

$ 436

$ 104

$ 328

Geographic area data was as follows:

United States
Europe
Other Areas

Total

2003

$   8,547
4,863
2,291

$15,701

Revenues
2002(2)

$  9,096
4,425
2,328

$15,849

2001

$10,034
5,039
1,935

$17,008

2003

$1,477
616
460

$2,553

Long-Lived Assets (1)

2002

$1,524
718
379

$2,621

2001

$1,880
767
706

$3,353

(1) Long-lived assets are comprised of (i) land, buildings and equipment, net, (ii) on-lease equipment, net, and (iii) capitalized software costs, net.

(2) Amounts have been revised to reflect reclassification of revenues previously reported in the United States.

Note 9 – Supplementary Financial
Information

The components of other current assets and other cur-
rent liabilities at December 31, 2003 and 2002 were as
follows:

Other current assets
Deferred taxes
Restricted cash
Prepaid expenses
Financial derivative instruments
Other

Total

Other current liabilities
Income taxes payable
Other taxes payable
Interest payable
Restructuring reserves
Due to Fuji Xerox
Financial derivative instruments
Other

Total

2003

2002

$   402
386
35
24
258

$   449
263
140
85
250

$1,105

$1,187

$   264
289
147
180
111
51
610

$   236
177
187
286
117
70
760

$1,652

$1,833

The components of other long-term assets and
other long-term liabilities at December 31, 2003 and
2002 were as follows:

Other long-term assets
Prepaid pension costs
Net investment in discontinued operations
Internal use software, net
Restricted cash
Investments in non-affiliated companies
Financial derivative instruments
Debt issuance costs
Other

2003

2002

$   736
449
307
343
104
89
79
370

$   611
728
341
414
24
122
159
351

Total other long-term assets

$2,477

$2,750

Other long-term liabilities
Deferred and other tax liabilities
Minorities’ interests in equity of subsidiaries
Financial derivative instruments
Other

$   809
102
11
356

$   831
73
14
299

Total other long-term liabilities

$1,278

$1,217

Net investment in discontinued operations: Our net
investment in discontinued operations is primarily
related to the disengagement from our former insur-
ance holding company, Talegen Holdings, Inc.
(“Talegen”), and consists of our net investment in

57

Investments in non-affiliated companies: This caption
includes marketable securities classified as “available
for sale” instruments in accordance with SFAS No.
115, “Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and
Equity Securities.” These investments have an original
cost of $51 and are reflected in the consolidated finan-
cial statements at their quoted fair value, based on
publicly traded common shares, of $68. For the year
ended December 31, 2003, the Company recorded net
unrealized gains of $17 within Accumulated Other
Comprehensive Loss.

Note 10 – Debt

Short-Term Debt: Short-term borrowings at December
31, 2003 and 2002 were as follows:

Notes payable
Euro secured borrowing

Total short-term debt
Current maturities of long-term debt

Total

2003

2002

$     42
–

42
4,194

$     20
377

397
3,980

$4,236

$4,377

We classify our debt based on the contractual
maturity dates of the underlying debt instruments or
as of the earliest put date available to the debt holders.
We defer costs associated with debt issuance over the
applicable term or to the first put date, in the case of
convertible debt or debt with a put feature. Total
deferred debt issuance costs included in Other long-
term assets were $79 as of December 31, 2003. These
costs are amortized as interest expense in our
Consolidated Statement of Income.

Ridge Reinsurance Limited (“Ridge Re”) and a per-
formance-based instrument relating to the 1997 sale of
The Resolution Group (“TRG”).

Ridge Re: We provide aggregate excess of loss reinsur-
ance coverage (the Reinsurance Agreement) to one of
the former Talegen units, TRG, through Ridge Re, a
wholly-owned subsidiary. The coverage limit for this
remaining Reinsurance Agreement is $578. We have
guaranteed that Ridge Re will meet all its financial obli-
gations under the remaining Reinsurance Agreement.
Ridge Re maintains an investment portfolio in a trust
that is required to provide security with respect to
aggregate excess of loss reinsurance obligations under
the remaining Reinsurance Agreement. At December
31, 2003 and 2002, the balance of the investments in
the trust, consisting of U.S. government, government
agency and high quality corporate bonds, was $531
and $759, respectively. Our remaining net investment
in Ridge Re was $77 and $325 at December 31, 2003
and 2002, respectively. Based on Ridge Re’s current
projections of investment returns and reinsurance 
payment obligations, we expect to fully recover our
remaining investment. The projected reinsurance pay-
ments are based on actuarial estimates. The decline in
our net investment in 2003 primarily relates to a return
of previously restricted cash pursuant to terms of the
underlying insurance contracts.

Performance-Based Instrument: In connection with 
the 1997 sale of TRG, we received a $462 perform-
ance-based instrument as partial consideration. Cash
distributions are paid on the instrument, based on 
72.5 percent of TRG’s available cash flow as defined in
the sale agreement. For the years ended December 31,
2003 and 2002, we received cash distributions of $23
and $24, respectively. The recovery of this instrument
is dependent upon the sufficiency of TRG’s available
cash flows. Such cash flows are supported by TRG’s
ultimate parent via a subscription agreement whereby
the parent has agreed to purchase from TRG an estab-
lished number of shares of this instrument each year
through 2017. Based on current cash flow projections,
we expect to fully recover the $387 remaining balance
of this instrument.

Internal Use Software: Capitalized direct costs associ-
ated with developing, purchasing or otherwise acquir-
ing software for internal use are amortized on a
straight-line basis over the expected useful life of the
software, beginning when the software is implement-
ed. The software useful lives generally vary from 3 to 5
years. Amortization expense, including applicable
impairment charges, was $63, $215, and $132 for the
years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001,
respectively.

58

Long-Term Debt: Long-term debt, including debt
secured by finance receivables at December 31, 2003
and 2002 was as follows:

International
Operations

Weighted Average
Interest Rates at
December 31, 2003

2003

2002

U.S. Operations

Weighted Average
Interest Rates at
December 31, 2003

2003

2002

Xerox Corporation
Notes due 2003
Notes due 2004
Euro notes due 2004
Notes due 2006
Notes due 2007
Notes due 2008
Senior Notes due 2009
Euro Senior Notes due 2009
Senior Notes due 2010
Notes due 2011
Senior Notes due 2013
Notes due 2014
Notes due 2016
Convertible notes due 2018
2003/2002 Credit Facility
Other debt due 2003-2018

Subtotal

Xerox Credit Corporation
Notes due 2003
Yen notes due 2005
Yen notes due 2007
Notes due 2008
Notes due 2012
Notes due 2013
Notes due 2014
Notes due 2018

Subtotal

Other US Operations
Borrowings secured by 
finance receivables (1)

Borrowings secured by other assets

Subtotal

Total U.S. Operations

–% $        –
194
377
15
25
27
616
272
701
50
548
19
254
–
300
–

7.15
3.50
7.25
7.38
1.45
9.75
9.75
7.13
7.01
7.63
9.00
7.20
–
3.42
–

$     883
196
315
15
25
25
626
226
–
50
–
19
255
556
3,440
40

$3,398

$6,671

–
1.50
2.00
6.50
7.12
6.50
6.06
7.00

–
936
281
25
125
59
50
25

463
845
255
25
125
59
50
25

1,501

1,847

4.74
7.46

2,598
70

2,469
–

$2,668

$  2,469

$7,567

$10,987

Xerox Capital (Europe) plc:
Euros due 2003-2008
Japanese yen due 2003-2005
U.S. dollars due 2003-2008

Subtotal

Other International Operations:
Pound Sterling secured 
borrowings due 2003
Pound Sterling secured 

borrowings due 2008 (1)

Euro secured borrowings due 

2005-2007 (1)

Canadian dollars secured 

borrowings due 2003-2006 (1)

Other debt due 2003-2008

Subtotal

Total International Operations

Subtotal

5.25% $   942
1.30
93
5.89
525

$     784
84
523

1,560

1,391

–

–

529

6.09

3.59

5.82
9.39

570

817

440
170

–

206

319
342

1,997

3,557

1,396

2,787

11,124

13,774

Less current maturities

4.99

(4,194)

(3,980)

Total long-term debt

$6,930

$9,794

(1) Refer to Note 4 for further discussion of borrowings secured by finance

receivables, net.

Consolidated Long-Term Debt Maturities: Scheduled
payments due on long-term debt for the next five
years and thereafter follow:

2004

2005

$4,194

$2,129

2006

$486

2007

2008 Thereafter

Total

$775

$782

$2,758 $11,124

Certain of our debt agreements allow us to

redeem outstanding debt prior to scheduled maturity.
The actual decision as to early redemption, when and
if possible, will be made at the time the early redemp-
tion option becomes exercisable and will be based on
liquidity, prevailing economic and business condi-
tions, and the relative costs of new borrowing.

Convertible Debt due 2018: In 1998, we issued 
convertible subordinated debentures for net proceeds
of $575. The original scheduled amount due was
$1,012 which corresponded to an effective interest 
rate of 3.625 percent per year. The debentures were
convertible into 7.808 shares of our common stock 
per 1,000 dollars principal amount at maturity of the
debentures and also contained a put option exercis-
able in 2003. In April 2003, $560 of this convertible
debt was put back to us in accordance with terms of
the debt and was paid in cash.

Debt-for-Equity Exchanges: During 2002, we
exchanged an aggregate of $52 of debt through the
exchange of 6.4 million shares of common stock val-
ued at $51 using the fair market value at the date of

59

exchange (including the convertible debt mentioned
above). A gain of $1 was recorded in connection with
these transactions. During 2001, we retired $374 of
long-term debt through the exchange of 41 million
shares of common stock valued at $311. A gain of $63
was recorded in connection with these transactions.
The gains were recorded in Other expenses, net in our
Consolidated Statements of Income. The shares were
valued using the daily volume-weighted average price
of our common stock over a specified number of days
prior to the exchange, based on contractual terms.

Lines of Credit: As of December 31, 2002, we had 
$3.5 billion of debt outstanding (including a $2 billion
term loan and a fully drawn $1.5 billion revolving cred-
it facility). In June 2003, using the proceeds from pub-
lic offerings and available cash on hand, we repaid
outstanding amounts under this agreement and we
subsequently entered into the 2003 Credit Facility. The
2003 Credit Facility consists of a fully drawn $300 term
loan and a $700 revolving credit facility that includes a
$200 letter of credit sub-facility, under which $51 of let-
ters of credit were outstanding at December 31, 2003.
Xerox is the only borrower of the term loan. The
revolving credit facility is available, without sub-limit,
to Xerox and certain foreign subsidiaries of Xerox,
including Xerox Canada Capital Limited, Xerox Capital
(Europe) plc and other qualified foreign subsidiaries
(excluding Xerox, the “Overseas Borrowers”). The
2003 Credit Facility matures on September 30, 2008. In
conjunction with the 2003 Credit Facility, debt issuance
costs of $29 were deferred.

Subject to certain limits described in the following

paragraph, the obligations under the 2003 Credit
Facility are secured by liens on substantially all the
assets of Xerox and each of our U.S. subsidiaries that
have a consolidated net worth from time to time of
$100 or more (the “Material Subsidiaries”), excluding
Xerox Credit Corporation (“XCC”) and certain other
finance subsidiaries, and are guaranteed by certain
Material Subsidiaries. Xerox is required to guarantee
the obligations of the Overseas Borrowers. At
December 31, 2003, Xerox is the only borrower 
under the 2003 Credit Facility.

Under the terms of certain of our outstanding pub-

lic bond indentures, the amount of obligations under
the 2003 Credit Facility that can be (1) secured by
assets (the “Restricted Assets”) of (a) Xerox and 
(b) our non-financing subsidiaries that have a consoli-
dated net worth of at least $100, without (2) triggering
a requirement to also secure those indentures, is limit-
ed to the excess of (x) 20 percent of our consolidated
net worth (as defined in the public bond indentures)
over (y) the outstanding amount of certain other debt
that is secured by the Restricted Assets. Accordingly,
the amount of 2003 Credit Facility debt secured by the
Restricted Assets will vary from time to time with
changes in our consolidated net worth. The amount of

60

security provided under this formula accrues ratably
to the benefit of both the term loan and revolving
loans under the 2003 Credit Facility.

The term loan and the revolving loans bear 
interest at LIBOR plus a spread that varies between
1.75 percent and 3.00 percent (or, at our election, at
the base rate plus a spread that varies between 
0.75 percent and 2.00 percent) depending on the then-
current Leverage Ratio under the 2003 Credit Facility.
The interest rate on the debt as of December 31, 2003
was 3.42 percent.

The 2003 Credit Facility contains affirmative and
negative covenants, as well as financial maintenance
covenants. Certain of the more significant covenants
under the 2003 Credit Facility are summarized below
(this summary is not complete and is in all respects
subject to the actual provisions of the 2003 Credit
Facility; the covenant levels indicated below are those
that are applicable for the period ending December 31,
2003 and thereafter):

(a) Limitations on the following will apply at all times

under the 2003 Credit Facility:

Minimum consolidated net worth of not less

than $3.0 billion (as defined in the 2003 Credit
Facility, net worth includes the preferred securities
issued by us as well as the deconsolidated trusts);
Maximum leverage ratio (a quarterly test that

is calculated as total adjusted debt divided by
EBITDA) ranging from 2.0 to 2.3; and

Creation and existence of liens, and certain

fundamental changes to corporate structure and
nature of business, including mergers.

(b) Limitations on the following will apply only until
such time that Xerox’s senior unsecured debt is
rated at least BBB- by S&P and Baa3 by Moody’s (the
“Ratings Condition”), and thereafter do not apply:
Minimum EBITDA (a quarterly test that is
based on rolling four quarters) ranging from $1.1
to $1.3 billion; for this purpose, “EBITDA” (earn-
ings before interest, taxes, depreciation, amortiza-
tion as well as certain non-recurring items, as
defined) generally means EBITDA, excluding inter-
est and financing income to the extent included in
EBITDA as consolidated net income; and

Maximum capital expenditures (an annual
test) of $405 during fiscal year 2003, and thereafter
an amount per fiscal year equal to $330 plus any
unused amount carried over from any prior fiscal
year; additional capital expenditures can be made
utilizing certain amounts that are otherwise avail-
able to make restricted payments and invest-
ments; for this purpose, “capital expenditures”
generally means the amounts included on our
statement of cash flows as “additions to land,
buildings and equipment,” plus any capital lease
obligations incurred.

(c) Limitations on the following will not apply at any

time that the Ratings Condition is satisfied, and
will be reinstated at any time that the Ratings
Condition is not satisfied:

Issuance of debt and preferred stock; asset trans-

fers; hedging transactions other than those entered
into in the ordinary course of business; certain types
of restricted payments relating to our, or our sub-
sidiaries’, equity interests and subordinated debt,
including (subject to certain exceptions) payment of
cash dividends on our common stock; certain trans-
actions with affiliates, including intercompany loans
and asset transfers and acquisitions.

(d) Limitations on investments shall apply only at

such times that Xerox’s senior unsecured debt is
rated less than BB by S&P and Ba2 by Moody’s.

The 2003 Credit Facility generally does not affect
our ability to continue to securitize receivables under
additional or existing third-party vendor financing
arrangements. Subject to certain exceptions, we can-
not pay cash dividends on our common stock during
the term of the 2003 Credit Facility, although we can
pay cash dividends on our preferred stock provided
there is then no event of default under the 2003 Credit
Facility. In addition to other defaults customary for
facilities of this type, defaults on other debt, or bank-
ruptcy, of Xerox, or certain of our subsidiaries, and a
change in control of Xerox, would constitute events of
default under the 2003 Credit Facility.

At December 31, 2003, we were in compliance
with all aspects of the 2003 Credit Facility including
financial covenants and expect to be in compliance for
at least the next twelve months. Failure to be in com-
pliance with any material provision or covenant of the
2003 Credit Facility could have a material adverse
effect on our liquidity and operations.

2010 and 2013 Senior Notes: In June 2003, we issued
$700 aggregate principal amount of Senior Notes due
2010 and $550 aggregate principal amount of Senior
Notes due 2013. Interest on the Senior Notes due 
2010 and 2013 accrues at the rate of 7.125 percent and
7.625 percent, respectively, per annum and is payable
semiannually on June 15 and December 15. In con-
junction with the issuance of the 2010 and 2013 Senior
Notes, debt issuance costs of $32 were deferred.
These notes, along with our Senior Notes due 2009
which were issued in January 2002, are guaranteed by
our wholly-owned subsidiaries Intelligent Electronics,
Inc. and Xerox International Joint Marketing, Inc.

2009 Senior Notes: In September 2003, we completed
our offer to exchange the €225 million and $600 aggre-
gate principal amount of our 9.75 percent unregistered
senior notes due 2009 for a like principal amount of 
9.75 percent senior notes due 2009 that have been reg-

istered under the U.S. Securities Act of 1933, as amend-
ed. As of the closing of the exchange offer, €224 million
of Euro senior notes and $587 of dollar senior notes 
had been tendered for exchange and the incremental
0.5 percent interest, that was required prior to the
exchange offer, ceased to accrue on all the outstanding
senior notes, whether or not tendered for exchange.

The senior notes also contain negative covenants

(but no financial maintenance covenants) similar to
those contained in the 2003 Credit Facility. However,
they generally provide us with more flexibility than the
2003 Credit Facility covenants, except that payment of
cash dividends on the 6.25 percent Series C
Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock is subject to
the conditions that there is then no default under the
senior notes, that the fixed charge coverage ratio (as
defined) is greater than 2.25 to 1.0, and that the
amount of the cash dividend does not exceed the then
amount available under the restricted payments bas-
ket (as defined).

Guarantees: At December 31, 2003, we have guaran-
teed $2.0 billion of indebtedness of our foreign wholly-
owned subsidiaries. This debt is included in our
Consolidated Balance Sheet as of such date.

Interest: Interest paid by us on our short-term debt,
long-term debt and liabilities to subsidiary trusts issu-
ing preferred securities amounted to $867, $903, and
$1,130 for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002
and 2001, respectively.

Interest expense and interest income consisted of:

Year Ended December 31,

2003

2002

2001

Interest expense (1)
Interest income (2)

$    884
(1,062)

$    896
(1,077)

$  1,001
(1,230)

(1) Includes Equipment financing interest of $362, $401 and $457 for the years
ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively, as well as non-
financing interest expense of $522, $495 and $544 for the years ended
December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively, that is included in Other
expenses, net in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

(2) Includes Finance income, as well as other interest income that is included

in Other expenses, net in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Equipment financing interest is determined based

on a combination of actual interest expense incurred
on financing debt, as well as our estimated cost of
funds, applied against the estimated level of debt
required to support our financed receivables. The esti-
mate is based on an assumed ratio of debt as com-
pared to our finance receivables. This ratio ranges
from 80-90 percent of our average finance receivables.
This methodology has been consistently applied for all
periods presented.

A summary of the Net cash payments on debt as
shown on the consolidated statements of cash flows
for the three years ended December 31, 2003 follows:

61

Cash proceeds (payments) 
on notes payable, net
Net cash proceeds from 

2003

2002

2001

$      22

$     (33)

$   (141)

issuance of long-term debt (1)
Cash payments on long-term debt

1,580
(5,646)

1,053
(5,639)

89
(2,396)

$(4,044)

$(4,619) $(2,448)

(1) Includes payment of debt issuance costs.

Note 11 – Financial Instruments

As a multinational company, we are exposed to market
risk from changes in foreign currency exchange rates
and interest rates that could affect our results of opera-
tions and financial condition. As a result of our
improved liquidity and financial position, our ability to
utilize derivative contracts as part of our risk manage-
ment strategy, described below, has substantially
improved. Certain of these derivative arrangements do
not qualify for hedge accounting treatment under SFAS
No. 133. Accordingly, our results of operations are
exposed to some volatility, which we attempt to mini-
mize or eliminate whenever possible. The level of
volatility will vary with the level of derivative hedges
outstanding, as well as the currency and interest rate
market movements in the period.

We enter into limited types of derivative contracts,

including interest rate swap agreements, foreign cur-
rency swap agreements, cross currency interest rate
swap agreements, forward exchange contracts, pur-
chased foreign currency options and purchased inter-
est rate collars, to manage interest rate and foreign
currency exposures. The fair market values of all our
derivative contracts change with fluctuations in inter-
est rates and/or currency rates and are designed so
that any changes in their values are offset by changes
in the values of the underlying exposures. Our deriva-
tive instruments are held solely to hedge economic
exposures; we do not enter into derivative instrument
transactions for trading or other speculative purposes
and we employ long-standing policies prescribing that
derivative instruments are only to be used to achieve a
very limited set of objectives.

Our primary foreign currency market exposures

include the Japanese yen, Euro, Brazilian real, British
pound sterling and Canadian dollar. For each of our
legal entities, we generally hedge foreign currency
denominated assets and liabilities, primarily through
the use of derivative contracts. In entities with signifi-
cant assets and liabilities, we use derivative contracts
to hedge the net exposure in each currency, rather
than hedging each asset and liability separately. We
typically enter into simple unleveraged derivative
transactions. Our policy is to transact derivatives only
with counterparties having an investment-grade or
better rating and to monitor market risk and exposure
for each counterparty. We also utilize arrangements
that allow us to net gains and losses on separate 

62

contracts, which further mitigates credit risk. Based
upon our ongoing evaluation of the replacement cost
of our derivative transactions and counterparty credit
worthiness, we consider the risk of a material default
by any of our counterparties to be remote.

Some of our derivative contracts and other materi-

al contracts at December 31, 2003 require us to post
cash collateral or maintain minimum cash balances in
escrow. These cash amounts are reported in our
Consolidated Balance Sheets within Other current
assets or Other long-term assets, depending on when
the cash will be contractually released (see Note 1).

Interest Rate Risk Management: Virtually all customer-
financing assets earn fixed rates of interest and a sig-
nificant portion of those assets has been matched to
secured vendor financing loan arrangements which
generally bear fixed rates of interest. Our loans related
to vendor financing, from parties including GE, are
secured by customer-financing assets and are
designed to mature as we collect principal payments
on the financing assets which secure them. The inter-
est rates on a significant portion of those loans are
fixed. As a result, the vendor financing loan programs
create natural match-funding of the financing assets to
the related debt.

Single Currency Interest Rate Swaps: At December 31,
2003 and 2002, we had outstanding single currency
interest rate swap agreements with aggregate notion-
al amounts of $2,491 and $3,820, respectively. The net
asset fair values at December 31, 2003 and 2002 were
$46 and $121, respectively.

Foreign Currency Interest Rate Swaps: In cases where
we issue foreign currency-denominated debt, we may
enter into cross-currency interest rate swap agree-
ments, if possible, whereby we swap the proceeds
and related interest payments with a counterparty. In
return, we receive and effectively denominate the debt
in local functional currencies.

At December 31, 2003 and 2002, we had outstand-
ing cross-currency interest rate swap agreements with
aggregate notional amounts of $696 and $879, respec-
tively. The net asset fair values at December 31, 2003
and 2002 were $4 and $21, respectively. Of the out-
standing agreements at December 31, 2003, the
Japanese yen was the largest single currency hedged.
Contracts denominated in Japanese yen and Pound
sterling accounted for over 95 percent of our cross-
currency interest rate swap agreements.

The aggregate notional amounts of interest rate
swaps by maturity date and type at December 31, 2003
follow:

Single Currency Swaps
Pay fixed/receive variable
Pay variable/receive fixed

Total

Interest rate paid
Interest rate received

Cross Currency Swaps
Pay fixed/receive fixed
Pay fixed/receive variable

Total

Interest rate paid
Interest rate received

2004

$167
–

$167

5.29%
2.10%

$   –
98

$  98

5.93%
1.15%

2005

$112
–

$112

6.46%
1.96%

$453
9

$462

3.37%
1.49%

2006

2007

Thereafter

Total

$12
–

$12

6.02%
2.83%

$  –
–

$  –

–
–

$    –
–

$    –

–
–

$136
–

$136

4.69%
2.00%

$   250
1,950

$2,200

4.36%
7.31%

$        –
–

$        –

–
–

$   541
1,950

$2,491

4.52%
6.69%

$   589
107

$   696

5.31%
2.36%

The majority of the variable portions of our swaps

Foreign Exchange Risk Management:

pay interest based on spreads against LIBOR or the
European Interbank Rate.

Fair Value Hedges: During 2003, pay variable/receive
fixed interest rate swaps with notional amounts of
$700 and $400 associated with the Senior Notes due in
2010 and 2013, respectively, were designated and
accounted for as fair value hedges. During 2002, pay
variable/receive fixed interest rate swaps with a
notional amount of $600 associated with the Senior
Notes due in 2009 were designated and accounted for
as fair value hedges. The swaps were structured to
hedge the fair value of the debt by converting it from a
fixed rate instrument to a variable rate instrument.
Accordingly, no ineffective portion was recorded to
earnings during 2003 or 2002.

We terminated various interest rate swaps with a

fair value of $136 during 2003 and $56 during 2002.
These derivatives were not previously designated as
hedges and, accordingly, the termination had no
impact on earnings.

Derivatives Marked-to-Market Results: While the
remainder of our portfolio of interest rate derivative
instruments is intended to economically hedge inter-
est rate risks to the extent possible, differences
between the contract terms of these derivatives and
the underlying related debt reduce our ability to obtain
hedge accounting in accordance with SFAS No. 133.
This results in mark-to-market valuation of these deriv-
atives directly through earnings, which, accordingly,
leads to increased earnings volatility. During 2003 and
2002, we recorded net losses of $13 and net gains of
$12, respectively, from the mark-to-market valuation
of interest rate derivatives for which we did not apply
hedge accounting.

Currency Derivatives: We utilize forward exchange
contracts and purchased option contracts to hedge
against the potentially adverse impacts of foreign cur-
rency fluctuations on foreign currency denominated
assets and liabilities including foreign currency-
denomination debt. Changes in the value of these cur-
rency derivatives are recorded in earnings together
with the offsetting foreign exchange gains and losses
on the underlying assets and liabilities.

We also utilize currency derivatives to hedge antic-
ipated transactions, primarily forecasted purchases of
foreign-sourced inventory and foreign currency lease,
interest and other payments. These contracts general-
ly mature in six months or less. Although these con-
tracts are intended to economically hedge foreign
currency risks to the extent possible, differences
between the contract terms of our derivatives and the
underlying forecasted exposures reduce our ability 
to obtain hedge accounting in accordance with SFAS
No. 133. Accordingly, the changes in value for a major-
ity of these derivatives are recorded directly through
earnings.

During 2003, 2002, and 2001, we recorded aggre-

gate exchange losses of $11 and $77 and aggregate
gains of $29, respectively. This reflects the changes in
the values of all our foreign currency derivatives, for
which we did not apply hedge accounting, together
with exchange gains and losses on foreign currency
underlying assets and liabilities.

At December 31, 2003, we had outstanding for-

ward exchange and purchased option contracts with
gross notional values of $4,232. The following is a
summary of the primary hedging positions and corre-
sponding fair values held as of December 31, 2003:

63

Notional

Gross Fair Value
Asset/
Value (Liability)

Fair Value of Financial Instruments: The estimated fair
values of our financial instruments at December 31,
2003 and 2002 follow:

2003

2002

Carrying
Amount

Fair Carrying
Value Amount

Fair
Value

$2,477

$2,477

$2,887

$2,887

2,159
4,236

2,159
4,281

2,072
4,377

2,072
3,837

1,809
6,930

2,407
7,177

1,793
9,794

1,610
9,268

Cash and cash 
equivalents

Accounts receivable, 

net

Short-term debt
Liabilities to trusts 

issuing preferred 
securities
Long-term debt

The fair value amounts for Cash and cash equiva-
lents and Accounts receivable, net approximate carry-
ing amounts due to the short maturities of these
instruments. The fair value of Short and Long-term
debt, as well as Liabilities to subsidiary trusts issuing
preferred securities, was estimated based on quoted
market prices for publicly traded securities or on the
current rates offered to us for debt of similar maturi-
ties. The difference between the fair value and the car-
rying value represents the theoretical net premium or
discount we would pay or receive to retire all debt at
such date.

Note 12 – Employee Benefit Plans

We sponsor numerous pension and other post-retire-
ment benefit plans, primarily retiree health, in our U.S.
and international operations. December 31 is the
measurement date for our domestic, Canadian, and
Mexican plans and September 30 is the measurement
date for our other foreign plans. Information regarding
our benefit plans is presented below:

Currency Hedged (Buy/Sell) 

Euro/Pound Sterling
Yen/US Dollar
US Dollar/Pound Sterling
Yen/Euro
Kronor/Pound Sterling
Pound Sterling/Euro
Euro/US Dollar
Euro/Yen
All Other

Total

$1,117
837
482
251
213
173
149
132
878

$4,232

$   5
16
(14)
(5)
–
(1)
8
3
(12)

$   –

Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss (“AOCL”):
During 2003, an $8 after-tax increase in the fair value
of cash flow hedges was recorded in AOCL while an
after-tax amount of $(6) was transferred to earnings as
a result of scheduled payments and receipts on the
cash flow hedges. This resulted in an ending gain
position relating to the cash flow hedges in AOCL of
$1 as of December 31, 2003. During 2002, less than 
$1 of an after-tax decrease in the fair value of cash
flow hedges was recorded in AOCL while an after-tax
amount of $10 was transferred to earnings as a result
of scheduled payments and receipts on the cash flow
hedges. This resulted in an ending loss position relat-
ing to the cash flow hedges in AOCL of $1 as of
December 31, 2002.

Cash Flow Hedges: During 2003, we entered into two
strategies to hedge the currency exposure of
Japanese yen denominated debt of $936 and $281. We
used cross currency swaps with notional amounts of
$453 and $136, respectively, to hedge the currency
exposure for interest payments and principal on half
of such debt and used forward currency contracts to
hedge the currency exposure for interest payments on
the remaining debt. These strategies converted the
hedged cash flows to U.S. dollar denominated pay-
ments and qualified for cash flow hedge accounting
under SFAS No. 133.

During 2003 and 2002, certain forward contracts

were used to hedge the interest payments on Euro
denominated debt of $377. In addition, certain forward
contracts were used to hedge Euro denominated inter-
est payments on other debt. The interest payments on
such debt were designated and accounted for as cash
flow hedges. Accordingly, the change in value of these
derivatives was included in AOCL and was not materi-
al for all periods presented. No amount of ineffective-
ness was recorded to the Consolidated Statements of
Income during 2003 or 2002 for our designated cash
flow hedges and all components of each derivatives
gain or loss are included in the assessment of hedge
effectiveness.

64

Change in Benefit Obligation
Benefit obligation, January 1
Service cost
Interest cost
Plan participants’ contributions
Plan amendments
Actuarial loss
Currency exchange rate changes
Divestitures
Curtailments
Special termination benefits
Benefits paid/settlements

Benefit obligation, December 31

Change in Plan Assets
Fair value of plan assets, January 1
Actual return on plan assets
Employer contribution
Plan participants’ contributions
Currency exchange rate changes
Divestitures
Benefits paid/settlements

Fair value of plan assets, December 31

Funded status (including under-funded and non-funded plans)
Unamortized transition assets
Unrecognized prior service cost
Unrecognized net actuarial loss

Pension Benefits

Other Benefits

2003

2002

2003

2002

$7,931
197
934
15
1
312
486
(45)
1
–
(861)

$8,971

$ 5,963
1,150
672
15
401
(39)
(861)

$ 7,301

(1,670)
(2)
(24)
1,870

$7,606
180
(210)
18
(31)
736
327
(1)
2
39
(735)

$7,931

$ 7,040
(768)
138
18
271
(1)
(735)

$ 5,963

(1,968)
–
(27)
1,843

$1,563
26
91
9
(30)
18
12
–
–
–
(110)

$1,579

$         –
–
101
9
–
–
(110)

$         –

(1,579)
–
(136)
447

$1,481
26
96
3
(139)
191
–
–
8
2
(105)

$1,563

$         –
–
102
3
–
–
(105)

$         –

(1,563)
–
(134)
445

Net amount recognized

$    174

$   (152)

$(1,268)

$(1,252)

Amounts recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheets consist of:
Prepaid benefit cost
Accrued benefit liability
Intangible asset
Minimum pension liability included in AOCL

Net amount recognized

Change in minimum liability included in AOCL

Information for benefit plans that are under-funded 

or non-funded on a Projected Benefit Obligation basis:

Aggregate projected benefit obligation
Aggregate fair value of plan assets

The accumulated benefit obligation for all defined 

benefit pension plans was $8,036 and $7,087 at 
December 31, 2003, and 2002, respectively.

$    756
(850)
6
262

$    174

$   (200)

$    629
(1,250)
7
462

$   (152)

$    406

$         –
(1,268)
–
–

$(1,268)

$         –
(1,252)
–
–

$(1,252)

Pension Benefits

Other Benefits

2003

$8,853
$7,164

2002

$7,865
$5,878

2003

$1,579
$        –

2002

$1,563
$        –

65

Information for pension plans with an accumulat-

ed benefit obligation in excess of plan assets:

Aggregate projected benefit obligation
Aggregate accumulated benefit obligation
Aggregate fair value of plan assets

$5,882
$5,207
$4,367

$5,845
$5,188
$4,008

2003

2002

Our domestic retirement defined benefit plans
provide employees a benefit, depending on eligibility,
at the greater of (i) the benefit calculated under a high-
est average pay and years of service formula, (ii) the
benefit calculated under a formula that provides for

Components of Net Periodic Benefit Cost
Defined benefit plans
Service cost
Interest cost (1)
Expected return on plan assets (2)
Recognized net actuarial loss
Amortization of prior service cost
Recognized net transition asset
Recognized curtailment/settlement loss (gain)

Net periodic benefit cost
Special termination benefits
Defined contribution plans

Total

the accumulation of salary and interest credits during
an employee’s work life, or (iii) the individual account
balance from the Company’s prior defined contribu-
tion plan (Transitional Retirement Account or TRA).
The benefit obligations included in this disclosure for
our domestic retirement defined benefit plans do not
include the impact of our settlement of the Berger liti-
gation, pending final acceptance of the settlement by
the court. Upon final acceptance by the court, the obli-
gations will be increased by the $239 liability already
recognized by Xerox. At December 31, 2003, the $239
liability is included in the caption “Pension and other
benefit liabilities” in our Consolidated Balance Sheet.

Pension Benefits

2003

2002

2001

2003

Other Benefits
2002

2001

$ 197
934
(940)
53
–
–
120

364
–
62

$ 180
(210)
134
7
3
(1)
55

168
27
10

$ 174
(184)
81
7
9
(14)
26

99
–
21

$  26
91
–
13
(18)
–
(4)

108
–
–

$  26
96
–
3
(5)
–
–

120
2
–

$  28
99
–
3
–
–
–

130
–
–

$ 426

$ 205

$ 120

$108

$122

$130

(1) Interest cost includes interest expense on non-TRA obligations of $289, $238, and $216 and interest (income) expense directly allocated to TRA participant

accounts of $645, $(448), and $(400) for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.

(2) Expected return on plan assets includes expected investment income on non-TRA assets of $295, $314, and $319 and actual investment income (losses) on

TRA assets of $645, $(448), and $(400) for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.

Plan Assets

Current Allocation and Investment Targets

As of the 2003 and 2002 measurement dates, the glob-
al pension plan assets were $7.3 billion and $6.0 bil-
lion, respectively. These assets were invested among
several asset classes. The amount and percentage of
assets invested in each asset class as of each of these
dates is shown below:

During 2003, we recognized settlement/curtail-

ment losses as a result of restructuring programs
implemented in 2002 and, during 2002, we incurred
special termination benefits and recognized curtail-
ment/settlement losses as a result of restructuring pro-
grams. Accordingly, in 2003, $33 of the total
recognized settlement/curtailment losses of $116 and
in 2002, the special termination benefit cost of $29,
and $18 of the total recognized settlement/curtailment
loss amount of $55 are included as restructuring
charges in our Consolidated Statements of Income.

Pension plan assets consist of both defined benefit

plan assets and assets legally restricted to the TRA
accounts. The combined investment results for these
plans, along with the results for our other defined ben-
efit plans, are shown above in the actual return on
plan assets caption. To the extent that investment
results relate to TRA, such results are charged directly
to these accounts as a component of interest cost.

66

Asset Category
Equity securities (1)
Debt securities (1)
Real estate
Other

Total

(1) None of the investments include debt or equity securities of Xerox Corporation.

Investment Strategy

The target asset allocations for our worldwide plans
for 2003 and 2002 were 60% invested in equities, 28%
invested in fixed income, 4% invested in real estate
and 8% invested in Other. The pension assets outside
of the U.S. as of the 2003 and 2002 measurement
dates, were $3.4 billion and $2.7 billion, respectively.
The target asset allocations for the U.S. pension
plan include 65% percent invested in equities, 30% per-
cent in fixed income and 5% in other investments.
Cash investments are sufficient to handle expected
cash requirements for benefit payments and will vary
throughout the year. The expected long-term rate of
return on the U.S. pension assets is 8.75 percent.

Xerox Corporation employs a total return invest-
ment approach whereby a mix of equities and fixed
income investments are used to maximize the long-
term return of plan assets for a prudent level of risk.
The intent of this strategy is to minimize plan expenses
by exceeding the interest growth in long-term plan lia-
bilities. Risk tolerance is established through careful
consideration of plan liabilities, plan funded status,
and corporate financial condition. This consideration
involves the use of long-term measures that address
both return and risk. The investment portfolio contains
a diversified blend of equity and fixed income invest-
ments. Furthermore, equity investments are diversified
across U.S and non-U.S. stocks as well as growth,
value, and small and large capitalizations. Other assets
such as real estate, private equity, and hedge funds are
used to improve portfolio diversification. Derivatives
may be used to hedge market exposure in an efficient
and timely manner; however, derivatives may not be
used to leverage the portfolio beyond the market value
of the underlying investments. Investment risks and
returns are measured and monitored on an ongoing
basis through annual liability measurements and 
quarterly investment portfolio reviews.

Expected Long Term Rate of Return

Xerox Corporation employs a “building block”
approach in determining the long-term rate of return
for plan assets. Historical markets are studied and
long-term historical relationships between equities and

Asset Value

Percentage of 
Total Assets

2003

2002

2003

2002

$4,222
1,900
366
813

$7,301

$3,422
1,718
238
585

$5,963

58%
26%
5%
11%

100%

57%
29%
4%
10%

100%

fixed income are assessed. Current market factors
such as inflation and interest rates are evaluated
before long-term capital market assumptions are
determined. The long-term portfolio return is estab-
lished giving consideration to investment diversifica-
tion and rebalancing. Peer data and historical returns
are reviewed periodically to assess reasonableness
and appropriateness.

Contributions

We expect to contribute $63 to our worldwide pension
plans and $114 to our other postretirement benefit
plans in 2004. There are no expected contributions to
the domestic tax qualified plans for the 2004 fiscal
year. However, once the 2004 actuarial valuations and
projected results as of the end of the 2004 measure-
ment year are available, the desirability of additional
contributions will be assessed.

Estimated Future Benefit Payments

The following benefit payments, which reflect expected
future service, as appropriate, are expected to be paid:

2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
Years 2009-2013

Other
Pension
Benefits Benefits

$  603
479
455
532
627
3,627

$114
124
131
136
138
692

67

Assumptions

Weighted-average assumptions used to 
determine benefit obligations at the 
plan measurement dates

Discount rate
Rate of compensation increase

Weighted-average assumptions used to 

determine net periodic benefit cost for 
years ended December 31

Discount rate
Expected return on plan assets
Rate of compensation increase

2003

Pension Benefits
2002

2001

2003

Other Benefits
2002

2001

5.8%
3.9

6.2%
3.9

6.8%
3.8

6.0%
N/A

6.5%
N/A

7.2%
N/A

2004

Pension Benefits
2002
2003

2001

2004

Other Benefits
2002
2003

2001

5.8%
8.1
3.9

6.2%
8.3
3.9

6.8%
8.8
3.8

7.0%
8.9
3.8

6.0%
N/A
N/A

6.5%
N/A
N/A

7.2%
N/A
N/A

7.5%
N/A
N/A

Assumed health care cost 

trend rates at December 31

Health care cost trend rate 
assumed for next year

Rate to which the cost trend rate

is assumed to decline 
(the ultimate trend rate)
Year that the rate reaches the 

ultimate trend rate

2003

2002

11.4%

13.8%

5.2%

5.2%

2008

2008

Assumed health care cost trend rates have a 
significant effect on the amounts reported for the
health care plans. A one-percentage-point change in
assumed health care cost trend rates would have the
following effects:

One-percentage- One-percentage-
point decrease

point increase

Effect on total service and 

interest cost components

Effect on post-retirement 

benefit obligation

$  4

$60

$  (4)

$(56)

Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and
Modernization Act of 2003

In December 2003, the Medicare Prescription Drug,
Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003 (“Act”)
was signed into law. The Act will provide prescription
drug coverage to retirees beginning in 2006 and will
provide subsidies to sponsors of post-retirement 
medical plans that provide prescription drug cover-
age. The obligations and benefit costs related to our
post-retirement medical plan disclosed above, do not
include the expected favorable impact of the Act,
pending authoritative accounting guidance regarding
how the benefit is to be recognized in the financial
statements in accordance with the provisions of FASB
Staff Position 106-1, “Accounting and Disclosure

68

Requirements Related to the Medicare Prescription
Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003,”
which was issued in January 2004. As the final guid-
ance has yet to be issued, we are unable to estimate
the impacts to our post-retirement benefit plan liabili-
ties. The issuance of final guidance could cause us to
change the other post-retirement benefits financial
information being reported above.

Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“ESOP”) Benefits: In
1989, we established an ESOP and sold to it 10 million
shares of our Series B Convertible Preferred Stock (the
“Convertible Preferred”) for a purchase price of $785.
Each Convertible Preferred share is convertible into 6
shares of our common stock. The Convertible Preferred
has a $1 par value and a guaranteed minimum value of
$78.25 per share and accrues annual dividends of $6.25
per share, which are cumulative if earned. The divi-
dends are payable in cash or additional Convertible
Preferred shares, or in a combination thereof.

When the ESOP was established, the ESOP bor-
rowed the purchase price from a group of lenders. The
ESOP debt was included in our Consolidated Balance
Sheet as debt because we guaranteed the ESOP bor-
rowings. A corresponding amount was classified as
Deferred ESOP Benefits, offsetting a portion of the
Convertible Preferred shares included in Shareholders’
Equity in our Consolidated Balance Sheets, and repre-
sented our commitment to future compensation
expense related to the ESOP benefits. In the second
quarter of 2002, we purchased the outstanding balance
of ESOP debt of $135 from third-party holders. In con-
nection with this purchase, we recorded an intercom-
pany receivable from the ESOP trust and the ESOP
recorded an intercompany payable to us, which elimi-
nated in consolidation. Accordingly, the purchase of
the ESOP debt effectively represented a retirement of
third party debt and therefore such debt was no longer
included in our Consolidated Balance Sheets. The pur-

chase of debt did not affect the recognition of compen-
sation expense associated with the ESOP; however, it
resulted in a decrease in interest expense in 2002.

The ESOP required pre-determined debt service
obligations for each period to be funded by a combi-
nation of dividends and employer contributions over
the term of the plan. The dividends do not affect our
Consolidated Statements of Income, while the contri-
butions are recorded as compensation expense in
such statements. We recognize ESOP costs based on
the amount committed to be contributed to the ESOP
plus related trustee, finance and other charges.

In July 2001, dividends on the Convertible

Preferred were suspended. As a result of the suspen-
sion of dividends, under the terms of the ESOP plan,
we were required to increase our contributions to the
ESOP in order to meet the pre-determined amount of
debt service obligations. In addition, since the divi-
dend requirement on the Convertible Preferred is
cumulative, dividends continued to accumulate in
arrears until dividends were reinstated. As of the end
of the third quarter of 2002, the cumulative dividend
amounted to $67. In September 2002, the payment of
Cumulative Preferred dividends was reinstated by our
Board of Directors and $67 of Convertible Preferred
dividends were declared. This resulted in a reversal of
the previously accrued incremental compensation
expense of $67. There was no corresponding earnings
per share improvement in 2002 since the EPS calcula-
tion requires deduction of dividends declared from
reported net income in arriving at net income avail-
able to common shareholders.

In the fourth quarter of 2003, the ESOP made its
final payment on the intercompany payable due to us.
This payment released all of the remaining ESOP
shares that were classified as Deferred ESOP Benefits
in our Consolidated Balance Sheets and effectively
ended our obligation to make future employer contri-
butions to the ESOP. However, dividends will continue
to accrue on the Convertible Preferred.

Information relating to the ESOP trust for the three

years ended December 31, 2003 follows:

Interest on ESOP Borrowings
Dividends declared on 

Convertible Preferred Stock
Cash contribution to the ESOP
Compensation expense

2003

$  –

2002

$  5

2001

$15

41
14
8

78
31
10

13
88
89

Note 13 – Income and Other Taxes

Income (loss) before income taxes for the three years
ended December 31, 2003 follows:

Domestic (loss) income
Foreign income

Income before income taxes

2003

$(299)
735

$ 436

2002

$  15
89

$104

2001

$(191)
519

$ 328

Provisions (benefits) for income taxes for the three

years ended December 31, 2003 follow:

Federal income taxes

Current
Deferred

Foreign income taxes

Current
Deferred

State income taxes

Current
Deferred

2003

2002

2001

$    77
(132)

$   39
(35)

$   11
(117)

144
72

(17)
(10)

145
(141)

(2)
(2)

474
114

(2)
(7)

$ 134

$     4

$ 473

A reconciliation of the U.S. federal statutory
income tax rate to the consolidated effective income
tax rate for the three years ended December 31, 2003
follows:

U.S. federal statutory 
income tax rate
Audit and other tax 

return adjustments

Change in valuation allowance 

for deferred tax assets

Dividends on Series B 

convertible preferred stock
State taxes, net of federal benefit
Effect of tax law changes
Tax-exempt income
Sale of partial ownership 
interest in Fuji Xerox
Goodwill amortization
Other foreign, including earnings 

taxed at different rates

Other

2003

2002

2001

35.0%

35.0%

35.0%

7.6

(53.7)

(42.8)

(3.8)

14.0

75.5

(3.1)
(2.7)
1.0
(1.0)

–
–

(22.7)
(2.3)
(15.3)
(9.3)

–
–

(2.7)
0.4

54.3
3.8

(1.2)
(1.8)
(3.2)
(4.0)

35.5
3.1

49.3
(1.2)

Effective income tax rate

30.7%

3.8% 144.2%

The difference between the 2003 consolidated
effective income tax rate of 30.7 percent and the U.S.
federal statutory income tax rate relates primarily to
tax benefits arising from the reversal of valuation
allowances on deferred tax assets following a re-
evaluation of their future realization due to improved
financial performance, other foreign adjustments,
including earnings taxed at different rates, the impact

69

of dividends on Series B Convertible Preferred Stock
and state tax benefits. Such benefits were partially off-
set by tax expense for audit and other tax return
adjustments, as well as recurring losses in certain
jurisdictions where we continue to maintain deferred
tax asset valuation allowances.

The difference between the 2002 consolidated
effective income tax rate of 3.8 percent and the U.S. fed-
eral statutory income tax rate relates primarily to the
recognition of tax benefits from the favorable resolution
of a foreign tax audit, tax law changes as well as the
retroactive declaration of Series B Convertible Preferred
Stock dividends. Such benefits are offset, in part, by tax
expense recorded for the ongoing examination in India,
the sale of our interest in Katun Corporation as well as
recurring losses in certain jurisdictions where we are
not providing tax benefits and continue to maintain
deferred tax asset valuation allowances.

The difference between the 2001 consolidated
effective income tax rate of 144.2 percent and the U.S.
federal statutory income tax rate relates primarily to the
recognition of deferred tax asset valuation allowances
resulting from our recoverability assessments, the taxes
incurred in connection with the sale of our partial inter-
est in Fuji Xerox and recurring losses in low tax jurisdic-
tions. The gain for tax purposes on the sale of Fuji
Xerox was disproportionate to the gain for book pur-
poses as a result of a lower tax basis in the investment.
Other items favorably impacting the tax rate included a
tax audit resolution and additional tax benefits arising
from prior period restructuring provisions.

On a consolidated basis, we paid a total of $207,
$442, and $57 in income taxes to federal, foreign and
state jurisdictions in 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.
Total income tax expense (benefit) for the three

years ended December 31, 2003 was allocated as 
follows:

Income taxes on income
Cumulative effect of change 
in accounting principle

Common shareholders’ equity(1)

2003

$134

–
123

2002

$     4

–
(173)

2001

$473

1
1

Total

$257

$(169)

$475

(1) For dividends paid on Series B Convertible Preferred Stock, tax effects of

items in accumulated other comprehensive loss and tax benefits related to
stock option and incentive plans.

In substantially all instances, deferred income
taxes have not been provided on the undistributed
earnings of foreign subsidiaries and other foreign
investments carried at equity. The amount of such
earnings included in consolidated retained earnings at
December 31, 2003 was approximately $5 billion.
These earnings have been permanently reinvested
and we do not plan to initiate any action that would
precipitate the payment of income taxes thereon. It is
not practicable to estimate the amount of additional

70

tax that might be payable on the foreign earnings. As
a result of the March 31, 2001 disposition of one-half
of our ownership interest in Fuji Xerox, the investment
no longer qualified as a foreign corporate joint ven-
ture. Accordingly, deferred taxes are required to be
provided on the undistributed earnings of Fuji Xerox,
arising subsequent to such date, as we no longer have
the ability to ensure permanent reinvestment.

The tax effects of temporary differences that give

rise to significant portions of the deferred taxes at
December 31, 2003 and 2002 were as follows:

Tax effect of future tax deductions
Research and development
Post-retirement medical benefits
Depreciation
Net operating losses
Other operating reserves
Tax credit carryforwards
Deferred compensation
Allowance for doubtful accounts
Restructuring reserves
Other

Valuation allowance

Total deferred tax assets

2003

2002

$ 1,238
491
482
442
262
237
182
151
69
340

$ 1,142
487
475
416
230
204
159
162
174
356

3,894
(577)

3,805
(524)

$ 3,317

$ 3,281

Tax effect of future taxable income

Unearned income and installment sales
Other

$(1,421) $(1,363)
(76)

(112)

Total deferred tax liabilities

Total deferred taxes, net

(1,533)

(1,439)

$ 1,784

$ 1,842

The above amounts are classified as current or
long-term in the Consolidated Balance Sheets in accor-
dance with the asset or liability to which they relate.
Current deferred tax assets at December 31, 2003 and
2002 amounted to $402 and $449, respectively.

The deferred tax assets for the respective periods
were assessed for recoverability and, where applica-
ble, a valuation allowance was recorded to reduce the
total deferred tax asset to an amount that will, more
likely than not, be realized in the future. The valuation
allowance for deferred tax assets as of January 1, 
2002 was $474. The net change in the total valuation
allowance for the years ended December 31, 2003 and
2002 was an increase of $53 and $50, respectively. 
The valuation allowance relates primarily to certain
foreign net operating loss carryforwards, tax credit
carryforwards and deductible temporary differences
for which we have concluded it is more likely than not
that these items will not be realized in the ordinary
course of operations.

Although realization is not assured, we have con-
cluded that it is more likely than not that the deferred
tax assets for which a valuation allowance was deter-
mined to be unnecessary will be realized in the ordinary
course of operations based on scheduling of deferred

tax liabilities and projected income from operating
activities. The amount of the net deferred tax assets
considered realizable, however, could be reduced in the
near term if actual future income or income tax rates
are lower than estimated, or if there are differences in
the timing or amount of future reversals of existing tax-
able or deductible temporary differences.

At December 31, 2003, we had tax credit carryfor-
wards of $237 available to offset future income taxes,
of which $158 is available to carryforward indefinitely
while the remaining $79 will begin to expire, if not uti-
lized, in 2004. We also had net operating loss carryfor-
wards for income tax purposes of $186 that will expire
in 2004 through 2023, if not utilized, and $2.2 billion
available to offset future taxable income indefinitely.

From 1995 through 1998, we incurred capital loss-
es from the disposition of our insurance group opera-
tions. Such losses were disallowed under the tax law
existing at the time of the respective dispositions. As a
result of IRS regulations issued in 2002, some portion
of the losses may now be claimed subject to certain
limitations. We have filed amended tax returns for
1995 through 1998 reporting $1.2 billion of additional
capital losses. As of December 31, 2003, we have 
$465 of capital gains available to be offset by the capi-
tal losses during the relevant periods and anticipate 
a potential tax benefit of approximately $160 to be 
recognized in a future period. The additional losses
claimed and related tax benefits are subject to formal
review by the U.S. government, which is currently in
process. We will not recognize any tax benefit of these
losses until this review has reached a stage where we
can estimate the probability of a favorable outcome.
All remaining capital loss carryforwards from this 
matter expired December 31, 2003.

Note 14 – Liability to Subsidiary Trusts
Issuing Preferred Securities

The Liability to Subsidiary Trusts Issuing Preferred
Securities included in our Consolidated Balance
Sheets reflects the obligations to our subsidiaries that
have issued preferred securities. These subsidiaries
are not consolidated in our financial statements
because it was determined that we are not the primary
beneficiary of the trusts and, therefore, are not permit-
ted to consolidate them in accordance with FIN 46R
(refer to Note 1 for further discussion). As of
December 31, 2003 and 2002, the components of our
liabilities to the trusts were as follows:

Trust II
Trust I
Deferred Preferred Stock

2003

2002

$1,067
665
77

$1,067
665
61

$1,809

$1,793

Trust II: In 2001, Xerox Capital Trust II (“Trust II”)
issued 20.7 million of 7.5 percent convertible trust pre-
ferred securities (the “Trust Preferred Securities”) to
investors for $1,035 and 0.6 million shares of common
securities to us for $32. With the proceeds from these
securities, Trust II purchased $1,067 of 7.5 percent con-
vertible junior subordinated debentures due 2021 of
one of our wholly-owned consolidated subsidiaries.
The subsidiary purchased $1,067 aggregate principal
amount of 7.5 percent convertible junior subordinated
debentures due 2021 of the Company. Trust II’s assets
consist principally of our subsidiary’s debentures and
our subsidiary’s assets consist principally of our
debentures. On a consolidated basis, we received net
proceeds of $1,004. Fees of $31 capitalized as debt
issuance costs and are being amortized to interest
expense over three years to the earliest put date.
Interest expense was $89 in 2003 and 2002. We have
effectively guaranteed, fully and unconditionally, on a
subordinated basis, the payment and delivery by our
subsidiary, of all amounts due on our subsidiary
debentures and the payment and delivery by Trust II of
all amounts due on the Trust Preferred Securities, in
each case to the extent required under the terms of
the securities.

The Trust Preferred Securities accrue and pay cash
distributions quarterly at a rate of 7.5 percent per year
of the stated amount of fifty dollars per security.
Concurrently, with the initial issuance of the Trust
Preferred Securities, our subsidiary used part of the
proceeds received from the Company of $229 to pur-
chase U.S. treasuries in order to secure its obligations
under its debentures through the distribution payment
date (November 27, 2004). The Trust Preferred
Securities are convertible at any time, at the option of
the investors, into 5.4795 shares of our common stock
per Trust Preferred Security (equivalent share price of
$9.125 per common share) (“the Conversion Ratio”).
The Trust Preferred Securities are mandatorily
redeemable upon the maturity of the debentures on
November 27, 2021 at fifty dollars per Trust Preferred
Security plus accrued and unpaid distributions.
Investors may require us to cause Trust II to purchase
all or a portion of the Trust Preferred Securities on
December 4, 2004, and November 27, 2006, 2008, 2011
and 2016 at a price of fifty dollars per Trust Preferred
Security, plus accrued and unpaid distributions. In
addition, if we undergo a change in control on or
before December 4, 2004, investors may require us to
cause Trust II to purchase all or a portion of the Trust
Preferred Securities. In either case, the purchase price
for such Trust Preferred Securities may be paid in cash
or our common stock, or a combination thereof.
However, our liability to the trust is classified as long-
term in our financial statements as we have the intent
and ability to convert the obligations to equity through
the issuance of common shares if put to us in 2004. If
the purchase price or any portion thereof consists of

71

common stock, investors will receive such common
stock at a value of 95 percent of its then prevailing
market price. Trust II may redeem all, but not part, of
the Trust Preferred Securities for cash, prior to
December 4, 2004, only if specified changes in tax 
and investment law occur, at a redemption price of
100 percent of their liquidation amount plus accrued
and unpaid distributions. On or at anytime after
December 4, 2004, Trust II may redeem all or a portion
of the Trust Preferred Securities for cash at declining
redemption prices, with an initial redemption price of
103.75 percent of their stated amount, subject to the
investors’ right to convert the Trust Preferred
Securities into shares of our common stock at the
Conversion Ratio at any time prior to any such
redemption date. The Company’s rights and liabilities
with respect to Trust II, through our other subsidiary,
contain identical conversion, put and call provisions
and would be redeemed in a similar manner as the
Trust Preferred Securities.

Trust I: In 1997, Xerox Capital Trust I (“Trust I”) issued
650 thousand of 8.0 percent preferred securities (the
“Preferred Securities”) to investors for $644 ($650 liq-
uidation value) and 20,103 shares of common securi-
ties to us for $20. With the proceeds from these
securities, Trust I purchased $670 principal amount of
8.0 percent Junior Subordinated Debentures due 2027
of the Company (“the Debentures”). The Debentures
represent all of the assets of Trust I. On a consolidated
basis, we received net proceeds of $637 which was net
of fees and discounts of $13. Interest expense, togeth-
er with the amortization of debt issuance costs and
discounts, amounted to $52 in 2003 and 2002. We
have guaranteed (the “Guarantee”), on a subordinat-
ed basis, distributions and other payments due on the
Preferred Securities. The Guarantee and our obliga-
tions under the Debentures and in the indenture pur-
suant to which the Debentures were issued and our
obligations under the Amended and Restated
Declaration of Trust governing the trust, taken togeth-
er, provide a full and unconditional guarantee of
amounts due on the Preferred Securities. The
Preferred Securities accrue and pay cash distributions
semiannually at a rate of 8 percent per year of the stat-
ed liquidation amount of one thousand dollars per
Preferred Security. The Preferred Securities are
mandatorily redeemable upon the maturity of the
Debentures on February 1, 2027, or earlier to the
extent of any redemption by us of any Debentures.
The redemption price in either such case will be one
thousand dollars per share plus accrued and unpaid
distributions to the date fixed for redemption.

Deferred Preferred Stock: In 1996, Xerox Capital LLC,
issued 2 million deferred preferred shares for
Canadian (Cdn.) $50 ($37 U.S.) to investors and all of
its common shares to us for Cdn. $13 ($10 U.S.). 

72

The total proceeds of Cdn. $63 ($47 U.S.) were loaned
to us. The deferred preferred shares are mandatorily
redeemable on February 28, 2006 for Cdn. $90 (equiv-
alent to $70 U.S. at December 31, 2003).

Note 15 – Litigation, Regulatory
Matters and Other Contingencies

Guarantees, Indemnifications and Warranty Liabilities:
As more fully discussed in Note 1, we apply the 
disclosure provisions of FIN 45 to our agreements that
contain guarantee or indemnification clauses. These
disclosure provisions expand those required by SFAS
No. 5, “Accounting for Contingencies,” by requiring
that guarantors disclose certain types of guarantees,
even if the likelihood of requiring the guarantor’s per-
formance is remote. As of December 31, 2003, we
have accrued our estimate of liability incurred under
these indemnification arrangements and guarantees.
The following is a description of arrangements in
which we are a guarantor.

Indemnifications provided as part of contracts and
agreements: We are a party to a variety of agreements
pursuant to which we may be obligated to indemnify
the other party with respect to certain matters.
Typically, these obligations arise in the context of con-
tracts that we entered into for the sale or purchase of
businesses or real estate assets, under which we cus-
tomarily agree to hold the other party harmless against
losses arising from a breach of representations and
covenants, including obligations to pay rent. These
relate to such matters as adequate title to assets sold,
intellectual property rights, specified environmental
matters and certain income taxes. In addition, we have
provided guarantees on behalf of our subsidiaries with
respect to real estate leases. In certain instances, these
lease guarantees may remain in effect subsequent to
the sale of the subsidiary. Furthermore, in certain con-
tracts we have agreed to indemnify various service
providers, trustees and bank agents from any third
party claims related to their performance on our behalf,
with the exception of claims that result from their own
willful misconduct or gross negligence. In each of
these circumstances, our payment is conditioned on
the other party making a claim pursuant to the proce-
dures specified in the particular contract, which proce-
dures typically allow us to challenge the other party’s
claims. In the case of lease guarantees, we may contest
the liabilities asserted under the lease. Further, our
obligations under these agreements and guarantees
may be limited in terms of time and/or amount, and in
some instances, we may have recourse against third
parties for certain payments we made.

Patent indemnifications – In most sales transac-

tions to resellers of our products, we indemnify
against possible claims of patent infringement caused

by our products or solutions. These indemnifications
usually do not include limits on the claims, provided
the claim is made pursuant to the procedures required
in the sales contract. For the indemnification agree-
ments discussed above, it is not possible to predict the
maximum potential amount of future payments under
these or similar agreements due to the conditional
nature of our obligations and the unique facts and cir-
cumstances involved in each agreement. Historically,
payments we have made under these agreements did
not have a material effect on our business, financial
condition or results of operations.

Indemnification of Officers and Directors – Our 
corporate by-laws require that, except to the extent
expressly prohibited by law, we must indemnify Xerox
Corporation’s officers and directors against judgments,
fines, penalties and amounts paid in settlement, includ-
ing legal fees and all appeals, incurred in connection
with civil or criminal action or proceedings, as it relates
to their services to Xerox Corporation and our sub-
sidiaries. The by-laws provide no limit on the amount
of indemnification. The current policy provides $105 of
coverage and has no deductible. The litigation matters
and regulatory actions described below involve certain
of our current and former directors and officers, all of
whom are covered by the aforementioned indemnity
and if applicable, the current and prior period insur-
ance policies. However, certain indemnification pay-
ments may not be covered under our directors’ and
officers’ insurance coverage. In addition, we indemnify
certain fiduciaries of our employee benefit plans for lia-
bilities incurred in their service as fiduciary whether or
not they are officers of the Company.

The Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”)

announced on June 5, 2003 that it had reached a set-
tlement with several individuals who are former offi-
cers of Xerox Corporation regarding the same
accounting and disclosure matters which were
involved in its investigation of Xerox Corporation.
These individuals neither admitted nor denied wrong-
doing and agreed to pay fines, disgorgement and
interest. These individuals are responsible for paying
their own fines. However, because all of the individu-
als who settled were officers of Xerox Corporation, we
were required under our by-laws to reimburse the
individuals for the disgorgement, interest and legal
fees of $19.

Product Warranty Liabilities: In connection with our
normal sales of equipment, including those under
sales-type leases, we generally do not issue product
warranties. Our arrangements typically involve a sepa-
rate full service maintenance agreement with the cus-
tomer. The agreements generally extend over a period
equivalent to the lease term or the expected useful life
under a cash sale. The service agreements involve the
payment of fees in return for our performance of
repairs and maintenance. As a consequence, we do

not have any significant product warranty obligations
including any obligations under customer satisfaction
programs. In a few circumstances, particularly in cer-
tain cash sales, we may issue a limited product war-
ranty if negotiated by the customer. We also issue
warranties for certain of our lower-end products in the
Office segment, where full service maintenance agree-
ments are not available. In these instances, we record
warranty obligations at the time of the sale. The fol-
lowing table summarizes product warranty activity for
the two years ended December 31, 2003:

Balance as of January 1
Provisions and adjustments
Payments

Balance as of December 31

2003

2002

$ 25
47
(53)

$ 19

$ 46
51
(72)

$ 25

Tax related contingencies: At December 31, 2003, our
Brazilian operations had received assessments levied
against it for indirect and other taxes which, inclusive
of interest, were approximately $449. The increase
since the December 31, 2002 disclosed amount of
$260 is primarily due to currency changes, indexation,
interest and additional assessments. The assessments
principally relate to the internal transfer of inventory.
We are disputing these assessments and intend to vig-
orously defend our position. Based on the opinion of
legal counsel, we do not believe that the ultimate reso-
lution of these assessments will materially impact our
results of operations, financial position or cash flows.
In connection with these proceedings, we may be
required to make cash deposits of up to half of the
total amount in dispute. Generally, any such amounts
would be refundable to the extent the matter is
resolved in our favor.

We are subject to ongoing tax examinations and
assessments in various jurisdictions. Accordingly, we
may record incremental tax expense based upon the
probable outcomes of such matters. In addition, when
applicable, we adjust the previously recorded tax
expense to reflect examination results. Our ongoing
assessments of the probable outcomes of the exami-
nations and related tax positions require judgment
and can materially increase or decrease our effective
tax rate, as well as impact our operating results.

Legal Matters: As more fully discussed below, we are
a defendant in numerous litigation and regulatory
matters involving securities law, patent law, environ-
mental law, employment law and the Employee
Retirement Income Security Act (“ERISA”). We deter-
mine whether an estimated loss from a contingency
should be accrued by assessing whether a loss is
deemed probable and can be reasonably estimated.
We assess our potential liability by analyzing our liti-
gation and regulatory matters using available informa-
tion. We develop our views on estimated losses in

73

consultation with outside counsel handling our
defense in these matters, which involves an analysis
of potential results, assuming a combination of litiga-
tion and settlement strategies. Should developments
in any of these matters cause a change in our determi-
nation as to an unfavorable outcome and result in the
need to recognize a material accrual, or should any of
these matters result in a final adverse judgment or be
settled for significant amounts, they could have a
material adverse effect on our results of operations,
cash flows and financial position in the period or peri-
ods in which such change in determination, judgment
or settlement occurs.

Litigation Against the Company:

In re Xerox Corporation Securities Litigation: A consol-
idated securities law action (consisting of 17 cases) is
pending in the United States District Court for the
District of Connecticut. Defendants are the Company,
Barry Romeril, Paul Allaire and G. Richard Thoman.
The consolidated action purports to be a class action
on behalf of the named plaintiffs and all other pur-
chasers of common stock of the Company during the
period between October 22, 1998 through October 7,
1999 (“Class Period”). The amended consolidated
complaint in the action alleges that in violation of
Section 10(b) and/or 20(a) of the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, as amended (“1934 Act”), and SEC Rule
10b-5 thereunder, each of the defendants is liable as a
participant in a fraudulent scheme and course of busi-
ness that operated as a fraud or deceit on purchasers
of the Company’s common stock during the Class
Period by disseminating materially false and mislead-
ing statements and/or concealing material facts relat-
ing to the defendants’ alleged failure to disclose the
material negative impact that the April 1998 restructur-
ing had on the Company’s operations and revenues.
The amended complaint further alleges that the
alleged scheme: (i) deceived the investing public
regarding the economic capabilities, sales proficien-
cies, growth, operations and the intrinsic value of the
Company’s common stock; (ii) allowed several corpo-
rate insiders, such as the named individual defen-
dants, to sell shares of privately held common stock of
the Company while in possession of materially
adverse, non-public information; and (iii) caused the
individual plaintiffs and the other members of the pur-
ported class to purchase common stock of the
Company at inflated prices. The amended consolidat-
ed complaint seeks unspecified compensatory dam-
ages in favor of the plaintiffs and the other members
of the purported class against all defendants, jointly
and severally, for all damages sustained as a result of
defendants’ alleged wrongdoing, including interest
thereon, together with reasonable costs and expenses
incurred in the action, including counsel fees and
expert fees. On September 28, 2001, the court denied

74

the defendants’ motion for dismissal of the complaint.
On November 5, 2001, the defendants answered the
complaint. On or about January 7, 2003, the plaintiffs
filed a motion for class certification. That motion has
not yet been fully briefed or argued before the court.
The parties are currently engaged in discovery. The
individual defendants and we deny any wrongdoing
and are vigorously defending the action. Based on the
stage of the litigation, it is not possible to estimate the
amount of loss or range of possible loss that might
result from an adverse judgment or a settlement of
this matter.

Christine Abarca, et al. v. City of Pomona, et al.
(Pomona Water Cases): On June 24, 1999, the
Company was served with a summons and complaint
filed in the Superior Court of the State of California for
the County of Los Angeles. The complaint was filed on
behalf of 681 individual plaintiffs claiming damages as
a result of our alleged disposal and/or release of haz-
ardous substances into the soil and groundwater.
Subsequently, six additional complaints were filed in
the same court on behalf of another 459 plaintiffs, with
the same claims for damages as the June 1999 action.
All seven cases have been served on the Company.
Currently there are approximately 1,050 plaintiffs, as
certain plaintiffs have been dismissed from the litiga-
tion. Plaintiffs in all seven cases allege that hazardous
substances from the Company’s operations entered
the municipal drinking water supplied by the City of
Pomona and the Southern California Water Company,
and as a result they were exposed to the substances
by inhalation, ingestion and dermal contact. Plaintiffs’
claims against the Company include personal injury,
wrongful death, property damage, negligence, tres-
pass, nuisance, and violation of the California Unfair
Trade Practices Act. Damages are unspecified. The
seven cases against the Company (“Abarca Group”)
have been coordinated with approximately 13 unrelat-
ed cases against other defendants which involve
alleged contaminated groundwater and drinking water
in the San Gabriel Valley area of Los Angeles County.
In all of those cases, plaintiffs have sued both the
providers of drinking water and the industrial defen-
dants who they contend contaminated the water. The
body of groundwater involved in the Abarca cases,
and allegedly contaminated by the Company, is sepa-
rate and distinct from the body of groundwater that is
involved in the San Gabriel Valley cases, and there is
no allegation that the Company is involved in the San
Gabriel Valley cases. Nonetheless, the court ordered
both groups of cases to be coordinated because both
groups concern allegations of groundwater and drink-
ing water contamination, have similar theories of lia-
bility alleged against the defendants, and involve a
number of similar legal issues, thus apparently mak-
ing it more efficient, in the view of the court, for all of
them to be handled by one judge. Discovery has

begun and no trial date has been set. The Company
denies any wrongdoing and is vigorously defending
the actions. Based on the stage of the litigation, it is
not possible to estimate the amount of loss or range of
possible loss that might result from an adverse judg-
ment or a settlement of this matter.

Carlson v. Xerox Corporation, et al.: A consolidated
securities law action (consisting of 21 cases) is pend-
ing in the United States District Court for the District of
Connecticut against the Company, KPMG and Paul A.
Allaire, G. Richard Thoman, Anne M. Mulcahy, Barry
D. Romeril, Gregory Tayler and Philip Fishbach. On
September 11, 2002, the court entered an endorse-
ment order granting plaintiffs’ motion to file a third
consolidated amended complaint. The defendants’
motion to dismiss the second consolidated amended
complaint was denied, as moot. According to the third
consolidated amended complaint, plaintiffs purport to
bring this case as a class action on behalf of an
expanded class consisting of all persons and/or enti-
ties who purchased Xerox common stock and/or
bonds during the period between February 17, 1998
through June 28, 2002 and who were purportedly
damaged thereby (“Class”). The third consolidated
amended complaint sets forth two claims: one alleg-
ing that each of the Company, KPMG, and the individ-
ual defendants violated Section 10(b) of the 1934 Act
and SEC Rule 10b-5 thereunder; the other alleging that
the individual defendants are also allegedly liable as
“controlling persons” of the Company pursuant to
Section 20(a) of the 1934 Act. Plaintiffs claim that the
defendants participated in a fraudulent scheme that
operated as a fraud and deceit on purchasers of the
Company’s common stock and bonds by disseminat-
ing materially false and misleading statements and/or
concealing material adverse facts relating to various of
the Company’s accounting and reporting practices and
financial condition. The plaintiffs further allege that
this scheme deceived the investing public regarding
the true state of the Company’s financial condition and
caused the plaintiffs and other members of the alleged
Class to purchase the Company’s common stock and
bonds at artificially inflated prices, and prompted a
SEC investigation that led to the April 11, 2002 settle-
ment which, among other things, required the
Company to pay a $10 penalty and restate its finan-
cials for the years 1997-2000 (including restatement of
financials previously corrected in an earlier restate-
ment which plaintiffs contend was improper). The
third consolidated amended complaint seeks unspeci-
fied compensatory damages in favor of the plaintiffs
and the other Class members against all defendants,
jointly and severally, including interest thereon,
together with reasonable costs and expenses, includ-
ing counsel fees and expert fees. On December 2,
2002, the Company and the individual defendants filed
a motion to dismiss the complaint. That motion has

been fully briefed, but has not been argued before the
court. The individual defendants and we deny any
wrongdoing and are vigorously defending the action.
Based on the stage of the litigation, it is not possible 
to estimate the amount of loss or range of possible
loss that might result from an adverse judgment or a
settlement of this matter.

Bingham v. Xerox Corporation, et al: A lawsuit filed 
by James F. Bingham, a former employee of the
Company, was pending in the Superior Court of
Connecticut, Judicial District of Waterbury (Complex
Litigation Docket) against the Company, Barry D.
Romeril, Eunice M. Filter and Paul Allaire. The com-
plaint alleged that the plaintiff was wrongfully termi-
nated in violation of public policy because he
attempted to disclose to senior management and to
remedy alleged accounting fraud and reporting irregu-
larities. The plaintiff further claimed that the Company
and the individual defendants violated the Company’s
policies/commitments to refrain from retaliating
against employees who report ethics issues. The
plaintiff also asserted claims of defamation and 
tortious interference with a contract. He sought: 
(i) unspecified compensatory damages in excess of
$15 thousand, (ii) punitive damages, and (iii) the cost
of bringing the action and other relief as deemed
appropriate by the court. The Company denied any
wrongdoing. The parties engaged in voluntary media-
tion which resulted in resolution of the dispute on
December 17, 2003 for an amount that was not 
material to the Company.

Berger, et al. v. RIGP: A class was certified in an action
originally filed in the United States District Court for
the Southern District of Illinois on July 25, 2000
against the Company’s Retirement Income Guarantee
Plan (“RIGP”). The RIGP represents the primary U.S.
pension plan for salaried employees. Plaintiffs
brought this action on behalf of themselves and an
alleged class of over 25,000 persons who received
lump sum distributions from RIGP after January 1,
1990. Plaintiffs asserted violations of ERISA, claiming
that the lump sum distributions were improperly 
calculated. On July 3, 2001, the court granted the
Plaintiffs’ motion for summary judgment, finding the
lump sum calculations violated ERISA. On September
30, 2002, the court entered a judgment on damages,
stating it would adopt plaintiffs’ methodology for cal-
culating such damages, resulting in a damage award
of $284. Based on advice of legal counsel, RIGP con-
cluded that success on appeal was probable and the
judgment would be overturned based on significant
errors of law in the lower court. RIGP appealed the
District Court’s ruling with respect to both liability and
damages. Subsequently, there were briefings, fol-
lowed by an oral argument of the appeal to the
Seventh Circuit Court of Appeals on April 9, 2003.

75

Following the oral argument, RIGP and its counsel
reassessed the probability of a favorable outcome
related to the litigation which resulted in the Company
recording a charge equal to the amount of the initial
judgment of $284 plus applicable interest, or $300 in
the first quarter of 2003. As sponsor of the Plan, we
were required to record the charge related to our obli-
gation as, under relevant accounting standards, the
results of the reassessment required recognition of the
judgment. On August 1, 2003, the Seventh Circuit
Court of Appeals affirmed the lower court’s judgment
in all material respects. On November 25, 2003, the
parties signed an agreement to settle the case for
$239, subject to court approval. The court gave its pre-
liminary approval to the settlement on December 5,
2003 and on January 22, 2004, after conducting a fair-
ness hearing, approved the settlement. As a result of
the settlement, the previously recorded charge was
reduced by $61 in the fourth quarter of 2003. The set-
tlement includes provisions that allow as yet unidenti-
fied claimants to submit damage claims for a period of
approximately three years. The Company (as plan
sponsor) has accrued an estimate of such additional
claims, which is included as part of the $239 settle-
ment. Although the total amount ultimately paid
under the final settlement amount could change, the
Company does not believe that any change would be
material to its results of operations or financial condi-
tion in any period. The settlement will be paid from
RIGP assets and would likely require the Company to
make additional contributions to the Plan. The timing
of any additional contributions under ERISA funding
rules would not be required any earlier than 2005.

Florida State Board of Administration, et al. v. Xerox
Corporation, et al.: A securities law action brought by
four institutional investors, namely the Florida State
Board of Administration, the Teachers’ Retirement
System of Louisiana, Franklin Mutual Advisers and
PPM America, Inc., is pending in the United States
District Court for the District of Connecticut against the
Company, Paul Allaire, G. Richard Thoman, Barry
Romeril, Anne Mulcahy, Philip Fishbach, Gregory
Tayler and KPMG. The plaintiffs bring this action indi-
vidually on their own behalves. In an amended com-
plaint filed on October 3, 2002, one or more of the
plaintiffs allege that each of the Company, the individ-
ual defendants and KPMG violated Sections 10(b) and
18 of the 1934 Act, SEC Rule 10b-5 thereunder, the
Florida Securities Investors Protection Act, Fl. Stat. ss.
517.301, and the Louisiana Securities Act, R.S.
51:712(A). The plaintiffs further claim that the individ-
ual defendants are each liable as “controlling per-
sons” of the Company pursuant to Section 20 of the
1934 Act and that each of the defendants is liable for
common law fraud and negligent misrepresentation.
The complaint generally alleges that the defendants
participated in a scheme and course of conduct that

76

deceived the investing public by disseminating materi-
ally false and misleading statements and/or conceal-
ing material adverse facts relating to the Company’s
financial condition and accounting and reporting prac-
tices. The plaintiffs contend that in relying on false and
misleading statements allegedly made by the defen-
dants, at various times from 1997 through 2000 they
bought shares of the Company’s common stock at arti-
ficially inflated prices. As a result, they allegedly suf-
fered aggregated cash losses in excess of $200. The
plaintiffs further contend that the alleged fraudulent
scheme prompted a SEC investigation that led to the
April 11, 2002 settlement which, among other things,
required the Company to pay a $10 penalty and
restate its financials for the years 1997-2000 including
restatement of financials previously corrected in an
earlier restatement which plaintiffs contend was false
and misleading. The plaintiffs seek, among other
things, unspecified compensatory damages against
the Company, the individual defendants and KPMG,
jointly and severally, including prejudgment interest
thereon, together with the costs and disbursements 
of the action, including their actual attorneys’ and
experts’ fees. On December 2, 2002, the Company and
the individual defendants filed a motion to dismiss all
claims in the complaint that are in common with the
claims in the Carlson action. That motion has been
fully briefed, but has not been argued before the court.
The individual defendants and we deny any wrongdo-
ing and are vigorously defending the action. Based on
the stage of the litigation, it is not possible to estimate
the amount of loss or range of possible loss that might
result from an adverse judgment or a settlement of
this matter.

In Re Xerox Corp. ERISA Litigation: On July 1, 2002, a
class action complaint captioned Patti v. Xerox Corp.
et al. was filed in the United States District Court for
the District of Connecticut (Hartford) alleging viola-
tions of the ERISA. Three additional class actions
(Hopkins, Uebele and Saba) were subsequently filed in
the same court making substantially similar claims. On
October 16, 2002, the four actions were consolidated
as In Re Xerox Corporation ERISA Litigation. On
November 15, 2002, a consolidated amended com-
plaint was filed. A fifth class action (Wright) was filed
in the District of Columbia. It has been transferred to
Connecticut and consolidated with the other actions.
The purported class includes all persons who invested
or maintained investments in the Xerox Stock Fund in
the Xerox 401(k) Plans (either salaried or union) during
the proposed class period, May 12, 1997 through
November 15, 2002, and allegedly exceeds 50,000 per-
sons. The defendants include Xerox Corporation and
the following individuals or groups of individuals dur-
ing the proposed class period: the Plan Administrator,
the Board of Directors, the Fiduciary Investment
Review Committee, the Joint Administrative Board,

the Finance Committee of the Board of Directors, and
the Treasurer. The complaint claims that all the forego-
ing defendants were fiduciaries of the Plan under
ERISA and, as such, were obligated to protect the
Plan’s assets and act in the interest of Plan partici-
pants. The complaint alleges that the defendants failed
to do so and thereby breached their fiduciary duties.
Specifically, plaintiffs claim that the defendants failed
to provide accurate and complete material information
to participants concerning Xerox stock, including
accounting practices which allegedly artificially inflat-
ed the value of the stock, and misled participants
regarding the soundness of the stock and the pru-
dence of investing their retirement assets in Xerox
stock. Plaintiffs also claim that defendants failed to
invest Plan assets prudently, to monitor the other fidu-
ciaries and to disregard Plan directives they knew or
should have known were imprudent, and failed to
avoid conflicts of interest. The complaint does not
specify the amount of damages sought. However, it
asks that the losses to the Plan be restored, which it
describes as “millions of dollars.” It also seeks other
legal and equitable relief, as appropriate, to remedy
the alleged breaches of fiduciary duty, as well as inter-
est, costs and attorneys’ fees. We filed a motion to dis-
miss the complaint. The plaintiffs subsequently filed a
motion for class certification and a motion to com-
mence discovery. Defendants have opposed both
motions, contending that both are premature before
there is a decision on their motion to dismiss. We and
the other defendants deny any wrongdoing and are
vigorously defending the action. Based on the stage of
the litigation, it is not possible to estimate the amount
of loss or range of possible loss that might result from
an adverse judgment or a settlement of this matter.

Digwamaje et al. v. IBM et al: A purported class action
was filed in the United States District Court for the
Southern District of New York on September 27, 2002.
Service of the First Amended Complaint on the
Company was deemed effective as of December 6,
2002. On March 19, 2003, Plaintiffs filed a Second
Amended Complaint that eliminated a number of cor-
porate defendants but was otherwise identical in all
material respects to the First Amended Complaint. The
defendants include Xerox and a number of other cor-
porate defendants who are accused of providing
material assistance to the apartheid government in
South Africa from 1948 to 1994, by engaging in com-
merce in South Africa and with the South African gov-
ernment and by employing forced labor, thereby
violating both international and common law.
Specifically, plaintiffs claim violations of the Alien Tort
Claims Act, the Torture Victims Protection Act and
RICO. They also assert human rights violations and
crimes against humanity. Plaintiffs seek compensatory
damages in excess of $200 billion and punitive dam-
ages in excess of $200 billion. The foregoing damages

are being sought from all defendants, jointly and sev-
erally. Xerox has filed a motion to dismiss the Second
Amended Complaint. Oral argument of the motion
was heard on November 6, 2003 and we are awaiting
the court’s decision. Xerox denies any wrongdoing
and is vigorously defending the action. Based upon
the stage of the litigation, it is not possible to estimate
the amount of loss or range of possible loss that might
result from an adverse judgment or a settlement of
this matter.

Arbitration between MPI Technologies, Inc. and Xerox
Canada Ltd. and Xerox Corporation: A dispute
between MPI Technologies, Inc. (“MPI”) and the
Company and Xerox Canada Ltd. (“XCL”) is being
arbitrated in Ontario, Canada. The dispute arose under
a license agreement (“Agreement”) made as of March
15, 1994 between MPI and XCL. Subsequently, the
Company became MPI’s primary interface for the
Agreement and the activities thereunder. MPI has
alleged damages of $69 for royalties owed under the
Agreement, $35 for breach of fiduciary duty, $35 in
punitive damages and unspecified damages and
injunctive relief with respect to a claim of copyright
infringement. The Company and XCL deny that any
royalties are owed and have asserted a counterclaim
against MPI for overpayment of royalties, breach of
contract and copyright infringement. The Company
and XCL deny any wrongdoing and are vigorously
defending the action. The hearing of the arbitration is
scheduled to commence on August 20, 2004. Based on
the stage of the arbitration, it is not possible to esti-
mate the amount of loss or the range of possible loss
that might result from an adverse ruling or a settle-
ment of this matter.

Accuscan, Inc. v. Xerox Corporation: On April 11, 1996,
an action was commenced by Accuscan, Inc.
(“Accuscan”), in the United States District Court for
the Southern District of New York, against the
Company seeking unspecified damages for infringe-
ment of a patent of Accuscan which expired in 1993.
The suit, as amended, was directed to facsimile and
certain other products containing scanning functions
and sought damages for sales between 1990 and
1993. On April 1, 1998, the jury entered a verdict in
favor of Accuscan for $40. However, on September 14,
1998, the court granted our motion for a new trial on
damages. The trial ended on October 25, 1999 with a
jury verdict of $10. Our motion to set aside the verdict
or, in the alternative, to grant a new trial was denied
by the court. We appealed to the Court of Appeals for
the Federal Circuit (“CAFC”) which found the patent
was not infringed, thereby terminating the lawsuit
subject to an appeal which has been filed by Accuscan
to the U.S. Supreme Court. The decision of the U.S.
Supreme Court was to remand the case (along with
eight others) back to the CAFC to consider its previous

77

decision based on the U.S. Supreme Court’s May 28,
2002 ruling in the Festo case. Shortly after remand of
the case to the CAFC, Accuscan sought reinstatement
of a $10 supersedeas bond in the District Court for the
Southern District of New York. On February 5, 2003,
the District Court refused to re-impose the bond,
despite the remand from the U.S. Supreme Court to
the CAFC, stating that “it [appears] unlikely that the
Federal Circuit will reverse itself.” On September 17,
2003 the CAFC reconsidered the case (in response to
the remand from the U.S. Supreme Court) and again
held that the patent was not infringed. On December
15, 2003, Accuscan filed a petition to the U.S. Supreme
Court to appeal the CAFC’s September 17, 2003 deci-
sion. We filed a brief in opposition on January 14,
2004, and the U.S. Supreme Court is expected to
decide the petition by March 31, 2004. We deny any
wrongdoing and are vigorously defending the action.

National Union Fire Insurance Company v. Xerox
Corporation, et al.: On October 24, 2003, a declaratory
judgment action was filed in the Supreme Court of the
State of New York, County of New York against the
Company and several current and former officers
and/or members of the Board of Directors. Plaintiff
claims that it issued an Excess Directors & Officers
Liability and Corporate Reimbursement Policy to the
Company in reliance on information from the
Company that allegedly misrepresented the
Company’s financial condition and outlook. The policy
at issue provides for $25 of coverage as a component
of the company reimbursement portion of an insur-
ance program that provides for up to $135 coverage
(after deductibles and coinsurance and subject to
other policy limitations and requirements) over a
three-year period. However, $10 of the entire amount
may be unavailable due to the liquidation of one of the
other insurers. Plaintiff seeks judgment (i) that it is
entitled to rescind the policy as void from the outset;
(ii) in the alternative, limiting coverage under the poli-
cy and awarding plaintiff damages in an unspecified
amount representing that portion of any required pay-
ment under the policy that is attributable to the
Company’s and the individual defendants’ own mis-
conduct; and (iii) for the costs and disbursement of the
action and such other relief as the court deems just
and proper. On December 19, 2003, the Company and
individual defendants moved to dismiss the com-
plaint. The motions have been fully briefed, but have
not been argued before the Court. The individual
defendants and the Company deny any wrongdoing
and are vigorously defending the action.

ePaperSign, LLC v. Xerox Corporation: On June 24,
2003 ePaperSign, LLC (“ePS”) commenced an action
in the United States District Court for the District of
Massachusetts against the Company, seeking unspeci-
fied damages. An amended complaint was filed on

78

August 29, 2003. The amended complaint generally
alleges that the Company fraudulently induced ePS
into entering an agreement to form entities intended
to commercialize and market electronic paper that had
been invented at the Company’s Palo Alto Research
Center, and intentionally misrepresented to ePS the
technological state of electronic paper. It further
alleges that the Company misappropriated software
contributed by ePS that was intended to support elec-
tronic paper based products. The amended complaint
includes claims of breach of fiduciary duty, promis-
sory estoppel, breach of contract, breach of implied
covenant of good faith and fair dealing, copyright
infringement and conversion. Xerox has responded to
the complaint and filed a counterclaim against ePS,
one of ePS’s four members and a representative of
that member. In an Initial Disclosure filed pursuant to
Rule 26(a)(1) of the Federal Rules of Civil procedure,
ePaperSign estimates its damages to be at least $44.
The Company denies any wrongdoing and is vigor-
ously defending the action. Based upon the stage of
the litigation, it is not possible to estimate the amount
of loss or the range of possible loss that might result
from an adverse ruling or a settlement of this matter.

Derivative Litigation Brought on 
Behalf of the Company:

In re Xerox Derivative Actions: A consolidated putative
shareholder derivative action is pending in the
Supreme Court of the State of New York, County of
New York against several current and former mem-
bers of the Board of Directors including William F.
Buehler, B.R. Inman, Antonia Ax:son Johnson, Vernon
E. Jordan, Jr., Yotaro Kobayashi, Hilmar Kopper, Ralph
Larsen, George J. Mitchell, N.J. Nicholas, Jr., John E.
Pepper, Patricia Russo, Martha Seger, Thomas C.
Theobald, Paul Allaire, G. Richard Thoman, Anne
Mulcahy and Barry Romeril, and KPMG. The plaintiffs
purportedly brought this action in the name of and for
the benefit of the Company, which is named as a nom-
inal defendant, and its public shareholders. The sec-
ond consolidated amended complaint alleged that
each of the director defendants breached their fiduci-
ary duties to the Company and its shareholders by,
among other things, ignoring indications of a lack of
oversight at the Company and the existence of flawed
business and accounting practices within the
Company’s Mexican and other operations; failing to
have in place sufficient controls and procedures to
monitor the Company’s accounting practices; know-
ingly and recklessly disseminating and permitting to
be disseminated, misleading information to share-
holders and the investing public; and permitting the
Company to engage in improper accounting practices.
The plaintiffs further alleged that each of the director
defendants breached his/her duties of due care and
diligence in the management and administration of

the Company’s affairs and grossly mismanaged or
aided and abetted the gross mismanagement of the
Company and its assets. The second amended com-
plaint also asserted claims of negligence, negligent
misrepresentation, breach of contract and breach of
fiduciary duty against KPMG. Additionally, plaintiffs
claimed that KPMG is liable to Xerox for contribution,
based on KPMG’s share of the responsibility for any
injuries or damages for which Xerox is held liable to
plaintiffs in related pending securities class action liti-
gation. On behalf of the Company, the plaintiffs seek a
judgment declaring that the director defendants violat-
ed and/or aided and abetted the breach of their fiduci-
ary duties to the Company and its shareholders;
awarding the Company unspecified compensatory
damages against the director defendants, individually
and severally, together with pre-judgment and post-
judgment interest at the maximum rate allowable by
law; awarding the Company punitive damages against
the director defendants; awarding the Company com-
pensatory damages against KPMG; and awarding
plaintiffs the costs and disbursements of this action,
including reasonable attorneys’ and experts’ fees. On
December 16, 2002, the Company and the individual
defendants answered the complaint. The plaintiffs
filed a third consolidated and amended derivative
action complaint on July 23, 2003 adding factual alle-
gations relating to subsequent acts and transactions,
namely indemnification of six former officers for dis-
gorgements imposed pursuant to their respective set-
tlements with the SEC and related legal fees, and
adding a demand for injunctive relief with respect to
that indemnification. On September 12, 2003, Xerox
and the individuals filed an answer to the third consol-
idated and amended derivative action complaint. The
individual defendants deny any wrongdoing and are
vigorously defending the action.

Pall v. KPMG, et al.: On May 13, 2003, a shareholder
commenced a derivative action in the United States
District Court for the District of Connecticut against
KPMG and four of its current or former partners. The
Company was named as a nominal defendant. The
plaintiff had filed an earlier derivative action against
certain current and former members of the Xerox
Board of Directors and KPMG. That action, captioned
Pall v. Buehler, et al., was dismissed for lack of jurisdic-
tion. Plaintiff purports to bring this current action
derivatively on behalf and for the benefit of the
Company seeking damages allegedly caused to the
Company by KPMG and the named individual defen-
dants. The plaintiff asserts claims for contribution
under the securities laws, negligence, negligent mis-
representation, breach of contract, breach of fiduciary
duty and indemnification. The plaintiff seeks unspeci-
fied compensatory damages (together with pre-judg-
ment and post-judgment interest), a declaratory
judgment that defendants violated and/or aided and

abetted the breach of fiduciary and professional duties
to the Company, an award of punitive damages for the
Company against the defendants, plus the costs and
disbursements of the action. On November 7, 2003,
the Company filed a limited motion to dismiss the
complaint on jurisdictional grounds and reserved its
right to later seek dismissal on other grounds. KPMG
and the individual defendants also filed limited
motions to dismiss. The motions have not been fully
briefed or argued before the court.

Lerner v. Allaire, et al.: On June 6, 2002, a shareholder,
Stanley Lerner, commenced a derivative action in the
United States District Court for the District of
Connecticut against Paul A. Allaire, William F. Buehler,
Barry D. Romeril, Anne M. Mulcahy and G. Richard
Thoman. The plaintiff purported to bring the action
derivatively, on behalf of the Company, which was
named as a nominal defendant. Previously, on June
19, 2001, Lerner made a demand on the Board of
Directors to commence suit against certain officers
and directors to recover unspecified damages and
compensation paid to these officers and directors. In
his demand, Lerner contended, inter alia, that man-
agement was aware since 1998 of material accounting
irregularities and failed to take action and that the
Company has been mismanaged. At its September 26,
2001 meeting, the Board of Directors appointed a spe-
cial committee to consider, investigate and respond to
the demand. In this action, plaintiff alleged that the
individual defendants breached their fiduciary duties
of care and loyalty by disguising the true operating
performance of the Company through improper undis-
closed accounting mechanisms between 1997 and
2000. The complaint alleged that the defendants bene-
fited personally, through compensation and the sale of
company stock, and either participated in or approved
the accounting procedures or failed to supervise ade-
quately the accounting activities of the Company. The
plaintiff demanded a judgment declaring that defen-
dants intentionally breached their fiduciary duties to
the Company and its shareholders; awarding unspeci-
fied compensatory damages to the Company against
the defendants, individually and severally, together
with pre-judgment and post-judgment interest; award-
ing the Company punitive damages; and awarding the
plaintiff the costs and disbursements of the action,
including reasonable attorneys’ and experts’ fees. On
September 18, 2002, the individual defendants and
Xerox filed a motion to dismiss the action, or alterna-
tively to stay the action pending the disposition of In
re Xerox Derivative Actions. On September 29, 2003,
the court issued an order granting the defendants’
motion to dismiss and on November 24, 2003 entered
judgment dismissing the action. The plaintiff did not
file an appeal and the appeal period expired on or
about December 26, 2003.

79

Other Matters:

Xerox Corporation v. 3Com Corporation, et al.: On April
28, 1997, we commenced an action in U.S. District Court
for the Western District of New York against Palm for
infringement of the Xerox “Unistrokes” handwriting
recognition patent by the Palm Pilot using “Graffiti.” On
January 14, 1999, the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office
(“PTO”) granted the first of two 3Com/Palm requests
for reexamination of the Unistrokes patent challenging
its validity. The PTO concluded its reexaminations and
confirmed the validity of all 16 claims of the original
Unistrokes patent. On June 6, 2000, the judge narrowly
interpreted the scope of the Unistrokes patent claims
and, based on that narrow determination, found the
Palm Pilot with Graffiti did not infringe the Unistrokes
patent claims. On October 5, 2000, the Court of Appeals
for the Federal Circuit reversed the finding of no
infringement and sent the case back to the lower court
to continue toward trial on the infringement claims. On
December 20, 2001, the District Court granted our
motions on infringement and for a finding of validity
thus establishing liability. On December 21, 2001, Palm
appealed to the Court of Appeals. We moved for a trial
on damages and an injunction or bond in lieu of injunc-
tion. The District Court denied our motion for a tempo-
rary injunction, but ordered a $50 bond to be posted to
protect us against future damages until the trial. Palm
provided a $50 irrevocable letter of credit in favor of
Xerox. In January 2003, after the oral argument, Palm
announced that it would stop including Graffiti in its
future operating systems. On February 20, 2003, the
Court of Appeals affirmed the infringement of the
Unistrokes patent by Palm’s handheld devices and that
Xerox will be entitled to an injunction if the validity of
the patent is favorably determined. It remanded the
validity issues back to the District Court for further 
validity analysis. On March 20, 2003, we sought recon-
sideration of the Court of Appeals opinion, but such
reconsideration was denied on April 8, 2003. The par-
ties anticipate being contacted soon by the District
Court regarding procedure to be followed on remand.
Because the validity of the patent must be reconsid-
ered, the basis for the protection bond no longer exists,
and the $50 irrevocable letter of credit has been
returned. We received a decision and order of the
District Court on July 21, 2003 which sets a schedule for
briefing of summary judgment with respect to the issue
of validity of the patent in suit, with a hearing for argu-
ment scheduled to occur on December 10, 2003.
Pursuant to a court order of July 17, 2003, (1) expert
reports were exchanged between the parties during the
third quarter 2003, (2) depositions of experts from both
sides were taken shortly thereafter, and (3) summary
judgment motions, directed solely to the issue of validi-
ty, were filed by the parties on October 10, 2003. On
December 10, 2003, the District Court heard oral argu-
ments on these summary judgment motions.

80

U.S. Attorney’s Office Investigation: The U.S. attor-
ney’s office in Bridgeport, Connecticut, is conducting
an investigation into matters relating to Xerox. Xerox
is a subject of this grand jury investigation. We believe
that the U.S. Attorney’s office is focusing on account-
ing and disclosure issues during the period 1998 to
2000, particularly relating to the Company’s operations
in Latin America. The accounting matters upon which
the U.S. Attorney’s office appears to be focusing are
ones that were investigated by the SEC and addressed
in the Company’s restatements. It is not possible at
this time to reasonably assess the final outcome of
this investigation or its future impact on the Company.
We are cooperating with the investigation and provid-
ing documents as requested.

Securities and Exchange Commission Investigation and
Review: On April 1, 2002, we announced that we had
reached a settlement with the SEC on the previously dis-
closed proposed allegations related to matters that had
been under investigation since June 2000. As a result, on
April 11, 2002, the SEC filed a complaint, which we simul-
taneously settled by consenting to the entry of an Order
enjoining us from future violations of Section 17(a) of the
Securities Act of 1933, Sections 10(b), 13(a) and 13(b) of
the 1934 Act and Rules 10b-5, 12b-20, 13a-1, 13a-13 and
13b2-1 thereunder, requiring payment of a civil penalty
of $10, and imposing other ancillary relief. We neither
admitted nor denied the allegations of the complaint.
The $10 civil penalty is included in Other Expenses, net in
2002 in the Consolidated Statement of Income. Under
the terms of the settlement, in 2001 we restated our
financial statements for the years 1997 through 2000.

As part of the settlement, a special committee of
our Board of Directors retained Michael H. Sutton, for-
mer Chief Accountant of the SEC, as an independent
consultant to review our material accounting controls
and policies. Mr. Sutton commenced his review in July
2002. On February 21, 2003, Mr. Sutton delivered his
final report, together with observations and recom-
mendations, to members of the special committee. On
April 18, 2003, a copy of Mr. Sutton’s report was deliv-
ered to the Board of Directors and the SEC. On June
17, 2003, the Board of Directors reported to the SEC
the decisions taken as a result of the report. We have a
comprehensive ongoing program addressing contin-
ued progress in enterprise risk management as well as
our process and systems management. We are devot-
ing significant additional resources to this end.

Other Matters: It is our policy to promptly and careful-
ly investigate, often with the assistance of outside
advisers, allegations of impropriety that may come to
our attention. If the allegations are substantiated,
appropriate prompt remedial action is taken. When
and where appropriate, we report such matters to the
U.S. Department of Justice and to the SEC, and/or
make public disclosure.

India. In recent years we have become aware of a
number of issues at our Indian subsidiary that
occurred over a period of several years much of which
occurred before we obtained majority ownership of
these operations in mid 1999. These issues include
misappropriations of funds and payments to other
companies, that may have been inaccurately recorded
on the subsidiary’s books, and certain improper pay-
ments in connection with sales to government cus-
tomers. These transactions were not material to the
Company’s financial statements. We have reported
these transactions to the Indian authorities, the U.S.
Department of Justice and to the SEC.

Series B Convertible Preferred Stock: As more fully
discussed in Note 12, in 1989 we sold 10 million
shares of our Series B Convertible Preferred Stock
(“ESOP Shares”) for $785 in connection with our
establishment of our ESOP. As of December 31, 2003,
all shares have been distributed to employees. As
employees with vested ESOP Shares leave the compa-
ny, we redeem those shares. We have the option to
settle such redemptions with either shares of common
stock or cash, but have historically settled in common
stock. Outstanding preferred stock related to our ESOP
at December 31, 2003 and 2002 were as follows
(shares in thousands):

South Africa. Certain transactions of our unconsolidated
South African affiliate that appear to have been
improperly recorded as part of an effort to sell sup-
plies outside of its authorized territory have been
investigated and a report of the results has been
received by the Board of Directors of the South African
affiliate. Disciplinary actions have been taken, and the
adjustments to our financial statements were not
material. Subsequent to these activities, in the second
quarter of 2003, we sold our interest in the South
African affiliate.

Nigeria. Following an investigation we have deter-
mined that certain inter-company and other balances
in the local books and records of our majority-owned
affiliate in Nigeria could not be substantiated. The
Company’s records did not reflect these amounts and
the local books have been adjusted to be consistent
with them. This adjustment has had no effect on our
financial statements. This matter has been reported to
the SEC and the Department of Justice. We are in the
process of liquidating this company in connection with
the December 2002 sale of our interest in the Nigerian
business to our local partner.

Eurasian Subsidiary. We have recently become aware
of a number of transactions in a Eurasian subsidiary
that appear to have been improperly recorded in late
2002 and early 2003. Appropriate disciplinary actions
have been taken and a charge of approximately 
$5 related to the periods prior to July 1, 2003 was
made in our financial statements for the third quarter
of 2003. This matter has been reported to the SEC.

Note 16 – Preferred Stock

As of December 31, 2003, we have two classes of pre-
ferred stock outstanding as well as one class of pre-
ferred stock purchase rights. In total, we are authorized
to issue approximately 22 million shares of cumulative
preferred stock, $1.00 par value.

2003
Shares Amount

2002
Shares Amount

Convertible  

Preferred Stock

6,380

$499

7,023

$550(1)

(1) This amount is presented on the face of the Consolidated Balance Sheet as

$508, which was net of deferred ESOP benefits of $42.

Series C Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock: In
June 2003, we issued 9.2 million shares of 6.25 per-
cent Series C Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock
with a stated liquidation value of $100 per share
(“Series C Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock”) in
connection with the Recapitalization (refer to Note 1)
for net proceeds of $889. The proceeds from these
securities were used to repay a portion of our indebt-
edness. Annual dividends of $6.25 per share are
cumulative and payable quarterly in cash, shares of
our common stock or a combination thereof.

On July 1, 2006, each share of Series C Mandatory
Convertible Preferred Stock will automatically convert
into between 8.1301 and 9.7561 shares of our com-
mon stock, depending on the then 20-day average
market price of our common stock. At any time prior
to July 1, 2006, holders may elect to convert each
share of Series C Mandatory Convertible Preferred
Stock into 8.1301 shares of our common stock. If at
any time prior to July 1, 2006, the closing price per
share of our common stock exceeds $18.45 for at least
20 trading days within a period of 30 consecutive trad-
ing days, we may elect, subject to certain limitations,
to cause the conversion of all, but not less than all, the
shares of Series C Mandatory Convertible Preferred
Stock then outstanding for shares of our common
stock at a conversion rate of 8.1301 shares of our 
common stock for each share of Series C Mandatory
Convertible Preferred Stock.

Preferred Stock Purchase Rights: We have a share-
holder rights plan designed to deter coercive or unfair
takeover tactics and to prevent a person or persons
from gaining control of us without offering a fair price
to all shareholders. Under the terms of the plan, one-
half of one preferred stock purchase right (“Right”)
accompanies each share of outstanding common
stock. Each full Right entitles the holder to purchase

81

from us one three-hundredth of a new series of pre-
ferred stock at an exercise price of $250. Within the
time limits and under the circumstances specified in
the plan, the Rights entitle the holder to acquire either
our common stock, the stock of the surviving compa-
ny in a business combination, or the stock of the pur-
chaser of our assets, having a value of two times the
exercise price. The Rights, which expire in April 2007,
may be redeemed prior to becoming exercisable by
action of the Board of Directors at a redemption price
of $.01 per Right. The Rights are non-voting and, until
they become exercisable, have no dilutive effect on
the earnings per share or book value per share of our
common stock.

Note 17 – Common Stock

We have 1.75 billion authorized shares of common
stock, $1 par value. At December 31, 2003, 138 million
shares were reserved for issuance under our incentive
compensation plans. In addition, at December 31, 2003,
2 million common shares were reserved for the con-
version of convertible debt, 31 million common shares
were reserved for conversion of Series B Convertible
Preferred Stock, 113 million common shares were
reserved for the conversion of Convertible Securities
related to our liability to Trust II, 90 million common
shares were reserved for the conversion of the Series C
Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock and 48 million
common shares were reserved for debt to equity
exchanges.

Stock Option and Long-term Incentive Plans: We have
a long-term incentive plan whereby eligible employees
may be granted non-qualified stock options, shares of
common stock (restricted or unrestricted) and stock
appreciation rights (“SARs”). Stock options and stock
awards are settled with newly issued shares of our
common stock, while SARs are settled with cash.

We granted 1.6 million, 1.6 million and 1.9 million
shares of restricted stock to key employees for the years
ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.
No monetary consideration is paid by employees who
receive restricted shares. Compensation expense for
restricted grants is based upon the grant date market
price and is recorded over the vesting period which on
average ranges from one to three years. Compensation
expense recorded for restricted grants was $15, $17 and
$15 in 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.

SARs permit the employee to receive cash equal

to the excess of the market price at date of exercise
over the market price at the date of grant. SARs gener-
ally vest over a three-year period and expire 10 years
from the date of grant. In 2003, we recorded $2 of
compensation expense relating to SARs.

Stock options generally vest over a period of six
months to three years and expire between eight and
ten years from the date of grant. The exercise price of
the options is equal to the market value of our com-
mon stock on the effective date of grant.

At December 31, 2003 and 2002, 21.4 million and

43.2 million shares, respectively, were available for
grant of options or awards. The following table pro-
vides information relating to the status of, and changes
in, stock options granted for each of the three years
ended December 31, 2003 (stock options in thousands):

Employee Stock Options

Outstanding at January 1
Granted
Cancelled
Exercised

Outstanding at December 31

Exercisable at end of year

2003

2002

2001

Average
Option
Price

$26
10
21
6

21

Stock
Options

76,849
31,106
(6,840)
(3,276)

97,839

58,652

Average
Option
Price

$29
10
34
5

26

Stock
Options

68,829
14,286
(5,668)
(598)

76,849

45,250

Average
Option
Price

$35
5
28
5

29

Stock
Options

58,233
15,085
(4,479)
(10)

68,829

36,388

82

Options outstanding and exercisable at 

December 31, 2003 were as follows (stock options 
in thousands):

Range of 
Exercise Prices

$  4.75 to $  6.98
7.13 to 10.69
10.70 to 15.27
16.91 to 22.88
25.38 to 36.70
41.72 to 60.95

Options Outstanding
Weighted
Number Average Remaining Weighted Average
Exercise Price

Contractual Life

Outstanding

Options Exercisable

Number Weighted Average
Exercise Price

Exercisable

11,229
41,275
561
13,218
13,388
18,168

97,839

6.56
8.11
7.33
6.00
2.76
3.64

6.08

$   4.85
9.02
12.56
21.77
31.64
52.55

$21.46

6,700
8,418
322
11,782
13,263
18,167

58,652

$   4.80
9.20
13.77
21.76
31.70
52.55

$29.76

When computing diluted EPS, we are required to
assume conversion of the ESOP preferred shares into
common stock under certain circumstances. The con-
version guarantees that each ESOP preferred share be
converted into shares worth a minimum value of
$78.25. As long as our common stock price is above
$13.04 per share, the conversion ratio is 6 to 1. As our
share price falls below this amount, the conversion
ratio increases.

The detail of the computation of basic and diluted

EPS follows (shares in thousands):

Note 18 – Earnings Per Share

Basic earnings per share is computed by dividing
income available to common shareholders (the
numerator) by the weighted-average number of com-
mon shares outstanding (the denominator) for the
period. Diluted earnings per share assumes that any
dilutive convertible preferred shares, convertible sub-
ordinated debentures, and convertible securities out-
standing were converted, with related preferred stock
dividend requirements and outstanding common
shares adjusted accordingly. It also assumes that out-
standing common shares were increased by shares
issuable upon exercise of those stock options for
which market price exceeds the exercise price, less
shares which could have been purchased by us with
the related proceeds. In periods of losses, diluted loss
per share is computed on the same basis as basic loss
per share as the inclusion of any other potential
shares outstanding would be anti-dilutive.

83

2003

2002

2001

$ 360

$  154

$   (92)

(30)
(41)

289
–

–
(73)

81
(63)

–
(12)

(104)
(2)

$ 289

769,032

$    18

731,280

$ (106)

704,181

$0.38
–

$0.38

$ 360
(35)
(30)

295
–

$ 295

769,032

8,273
51,082

828,387

$0.36
–

$0.36

$ 0.11
(0.09)

$ 0.02

$  154
(73)
–

81
(63)

$    18

731,280

5,401
70,463

$(0.15)
–

$(0.15)

$   (92)
(12)
–

(104)
(2)

$ (106)

704,181

–
–

807,144

704,181

$ 0.10
(0.08)

$ 0.02

$(0.15)
–

$(0.15)

Note 19 – Financial Statements of
Subsidiary Guarantors

The Senior Notes due 2009, 2010 and 2013 are jointly
and severally guaranteed by Intelligent Electronics,
Inc. and Xerox International Joint Marketing, Inc. (the
“Guarantor Subsidiaries”), each of which is wholly-
owned by Xerox Corporation (the “Parent Company”).
The following supplemental financial information 
sets forth, on a condensed consolidating basis, the
balance sheets, statements of income and statements
of cash flows for the Parent Company, the Guarantor
Subsidiaries, the non-guarantor subsidiaries and total
consolidated Xerox Corporation and subsidiaries as of
December 31, 2003 and December 31, 2002 and for the
years ended December 31, 2003, 2002, and 2001.

Basic Earnings per common share:
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
Accrued dividends on:

Series C Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock
Series B Convertible Preferred Stock, net

Adjusted income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle

Net income available to common shareholders

Weighted average common shares outstanding

Basic earnings per share:
Before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle

Basic earnings per share

Diluted Earnings per common share:
Income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
ESOP expense adjustment, net
Accrued dividends on Series C Mandatory Convertible Preferred Stock

Adjusted income before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle

Adjusted net income available to common shareholders

Weighted Average Common Shares Outstanding
Common shares issuable with respect to:

Stock options
Series B Convertible Preferred Stock

Adjusted Weighted Average Shares Outstanding

Diluted earnings per share:
Before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle

Diluted earnings per share

The 2003 and 2002 computation of diluted earn-
ings per share did not include the effects of 66 million
and 63 million stock options, respectively, because
their respective exercise prices were greater than the
corresponding market value per share of our common
stock. The 2001 computation of diluted loss per share
did not include 69 million stock options as the inclu-
sion of the options would have been antidilutive.
In addition, the following securities that could
potentially dilute basic EPS in the future were not
included in the computation of diluted EPS because to
do so would have been anti-dilutive (in thousands of
shares):

2003

2002

2001

–

43,656

–

–

78,473

–

113,426

113,426

113,426

–
1,992

7,129
1,992

7,129
1,992

159,074

122,547

201,020

Series B Convertible 
Preferred Stock

Series C Mandatory Convertible 

Preferred Stock
Liability to subsidiary 

trust issuing preferred 
securities–Trust II

Convertible subordinated 
debentures due 2018
Other convertible debt

Total

84

Condensed Consolidating Statements of Income
For the Year Ended December 31, 2003 

Parent

Company Subsidiaries

Guarantor Non-Guarantor
Subsidiaries

Revenues
Sales
Service, outsourcing and rentals
Finance income
Intercompany revenues

Total Revenues

Cost and Expenses
Cost of sales
Cost of service, outsourcing and rentals
Equipment financing interest
Intercompany cost of sales
Research and development expenses
Selling, administrative and general expenses
Restructuring and asset impairment charges
Gain on affiliate’s sale of stock
Provision for litigation
Other expenses (income), net

Total Cost and Expenses

(Loss) Income before Income Taxes (Benefits) 

and Equity Income
Income taxes (benefits)

(Loss) Income before Equity Income

Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates
Equity in net income of consolidated affiliates

$3,326
4,257
337
535

8,455

2,155
2,314
88
473
765
2,485
105
(13)
239
278

8,889

(434)
(108)

(326)
–
686

$ 54
44
–
–

98

48
52
–
–
1
36
–
–
–
(18)

119

(21)
7

(28)
11
–

$3,590
3,433
750
427

8,200

2,379
1,955
364
342
115
1,728
71
–
–
371

7,325

875
224

651
50
–

Eliminations

Total
Company

$

–
–
(90)
(962)

(1,052)

(146)
(10)
(90)
(815)
(13)
–
–
–
–
6

$ 6,970
7,734
997
–

15,701

4,436
4,311
362
–
868
4,249
176
(13)
239
637

(1,068)

15,265

16
11

5
(3)
(686)

436
134

302
58
–

Net Income (Loss)

$ 360

$ (17)

$ 701

$ (684)

$  360

85

Condensed Consolidating Balance Sheets
As of December 31, 2003 

Parent

Company Subsidiaries

Guarantor Non-Guarantor
Subsidiaries

Assets

Cash and cash equivalents
Accounts receivable, net
Billed portion of finance receivables, net
Finance receivables, net
Inventories
Other current assets

Total Current Assets

Finance receivables due after one year, net
Equipment on operating leases, net
Land, buildings and equipment, net
Investments in affiliates, at equity
Investments in and advances to consolidated subsidiaries
Intangible assets, net
Goodwill
Other long-term assets

Total Assets

Liabilities and Equity

$ 1,101
717
270
454
669
466

3,677

834
212
1,024
73
7,849
325
491
1,611

$

–
17
–
–
3
5

25

–
–
2
–
54
–
296
1

$ 1,376
1,425
191
2,527
517
634

6,670

4,537
176
801
571
192
–
935
2,391

Eliminations

$

–
–
–
–
(37)
–

(37)

–
(24)
–
–
(8,095)
–
–
–

Total
Company

$ 2,477
2,159
461
2,981
1,152
1,105

10,335

5,371
364
1,827
644
–
325
1,722
4,003

$16,096

$378

$16,273

$(8,156)

$24,591

Short-term debt and current portion of long-term debt
Accounts payable
Other current liabilities

$

Total Current Liabilities

Long-term debt
Intercompany payables, net
Liabilities to subsidiary trusts issuing preferred securities
Other long-term liabilities

588
495
890

1,973

2,840
3,687
98
2,819

Total Liabilities

Series B convertible preferred stock
Series C mandatory convertible preferred stock
Common stock, including additional paid in capital
Retained earnings
Accumulated other comprehensive loss

11,417

499
889
3,239
1,315
(1,263)

$

–
2
24

26

–
(45)
–
1

(18)

–
–
420
(24)
–

$

$ 3,648
401
1,510

5,559

4,090
(3,657)
1,711
683

8,386

–
–
7,083
1,980
(1,176)

–
–
11

11

–
15
–
101

127

–
–
(7,503)
(1,956)
1,176

$ 4,236
898
2,435

7,569

6,930
–
1,809
3,604

19,912

499
889
3,239
1,315
(1,263)

Total Liabilities and Equity

$16,096

$378

$16,273

$(8,156)

$24,591

86

Condensed Consolidating Statements of Cash Flows 
For the Year Ended December 31, 2003 

Parent

Company Subsidiaries

Guarantor Non-Guarantor
Subsidiaries

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities
Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and 

cash equivalents

(Decrease) increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

$

$ 2,673
(475)
(2,769)

–

(571)
1,672

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

$ 1,101

$

–
–
–

–

–
–

–

$ (794)
524
299

132

161
1,215

$1,376

Total
Company

$ 1,879
49
(2,470)

132

(410)
2,887

$ 2,477

Condensed Consolidating Statements of Income
For the Year Ended December 31, 2002 

Parent

Company Subsidiaries

Guarantor Non-Guarantor
Subsidiaries

Eliminations

Total
Company

Revenues
Sales
Service, outsourcing and rentals
Finance income
Intercompany revenues

Total Revenues

Cost and Expenses
Cost of sales
Cost of service, outsourcing and rentals
Equipment financing interest
Intercompany cost of sales
Research and development expenses
Selling, administrative and general expenses
Restructuring and asset impairment charges
Other expenses (income), net

Total Cost and Expenses

(Loss) Income before Income Taxes (Benefits), 

Equity Income and Cumulative Effect of Change 
in Accounting Principle
Income taxes (benefits)

(Loss) Income before Equity Income and 

Cumulative Effect of Change in Accounting Principle
Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates
Equity in net income of consolidated affiliates

Income (Loss) before Cumulative Effect of 

Change in Accounting Principle
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle

$3,396
4,589
294
327

8,606

2,055
2,471
119
294
804
2,607
95
255

8,700

(94)
(17)

(77)
(6)
237

154
(63)

$ 54
48
–
3

105

48
50
–
3
–
33
1
(25)

110

(5)
10

(15)
12
–

(3)
–

$3,302
3,460
806
510

8,078

2,284
1,987
382
379
125
1,797
574
360

7,888

190
5

185
53
–

238
(62)

Net Income (Loss)

$

91

$   (3)

$

176

$

–
–
(100)
(840)

(940)

(154)
(14)
(100)
(676)
(12)
–
–
3

(953)

13
6

7
(5)
(237)

(235)
62

$(173)

$  6,752
8,097
1,000
–

15,849

4,233
4,494
401
–
917
4,437
670
593

15,745

104
4

100
54
–

154
(63)

$        91

87

Condensed Consolidating Balance Sheets 
As of December 31, 2002 

Parent

Company Subsidiaries

Guarantor Non-Guarantor
Subsidiaries

Eliminations

Total
Company

Assets

Cash and cash equivalents
Accounts receivable, net
Billed portion of finance receivables, net
Finance receivables, net
Inventories
Other current assets

Total Current Assets

Finance receivables due after one year, net
Equipment on operating leases, net
Land, buildings and equipment, net
Investment in affiliates, at equity
Investment in and advances to consolidated subsidiaries
Intangible assets, net
Goodwill
Other long-term assets

Total Assets

Liabilities and Equity

$ 1,672
714
341
392
692
554

4,365

712
200
1,058
99
7,775
360
491
1,436

$16,496

Short-term debt and current portion of long-term debt
Accounts payable
Other current liabilities

$ 1,880
447
793

Total Current Liabilities

Long-term debt
Intercompany payables, net
Liabilities to subsidiary trusts issuing preferred securities
Other long-term liabilities

Total Liabilities

Series B convertible preferred stock
Common stock, including additional paid in capital
Retained earnings
Accumulated other comprehensive loss

Total Liabilities and Equity

3,120

4,791
2,602
726
2,856

14,095

508
2,739
1,025
(1,871)

$16,496

$    –
20
–
–
2
5

27

–
–
2
41
–
–
296
2

$368

$    –
6
30

36

–
(95)
–
–

(59)

–
420
7
–

$368

$ 1,215
1,338
223
2,696
545
694

6,711

4,641
265
697
555
686
–
777
2,903

$

–
–
–
–
(8)
(66)

(74)

–
(15)
–
–
(8,461)
–
–
1

$  2,887
2,072
564
3,088
1,231
1,187

11,029

5,353
450
1,757
695
–
360
1,564
4,342

$17,235

$(8,549)

$25,550

$

$ 2,497
386
1,608

4,491

5,003
(2,494)
1,067
839

8,906

–
7,140
2,839
(1,650)

–
–
140

140

–
(13)
–
80

207

–
(7,560)
(2,846)
1,650

$  4,377
839
2,571

7,787

9,794
–
1,793
3,775

23,149

508
2,739
1,025
(1,871)

$17,235

$(8,549)

$25,550

88

Condensed Consolidating Statements of Cash Flows 
For the Year Ended December 31, 2002 

Parent

Company Subsidiaries

Guarantor Non-Guarantor
Subsidiaries

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities
Net cash used in financing activities
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

Decrease in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

$ 2,812
(1,718)
(1,836)
–

(742)
2,414

$ 1,672

$ 4
(1)
(3)
–

–
–

$ –

$   (836)
1,812
(1,453)
116

(361)
1,576

$ 1,215

Total
Company

$ 1,980
93
(3,292)
116

(1,103)
3,990

$ 2,887

89

Condensed Consolidating Statements of Income
For the Year Ended December 31, 2001 

Parent

Company Subsidiaries

Guarantor Non-Guarantor
Subsidiaries

Eliminations

Total
Company

Revenues
Sales
Service, outsourcing and rentals
Finance income
Intercompany revenues

Total Revenues

Costs and Expenses

Cost of sales
Cost of service, outsourcing and rentals
Equipment financing interest
Intercompany cost of sales
Research and development expenses
Selling, administrative and general expenses
Restructuring and asset impairment charges
Gain on sale of half of interest in Fuji Xerox
Gain on affiliate’s sale of stock
Other expenses (income), net

Total Costs and Expenses

(Loss) Income before Income Taxes (Benefits), 

Equity Income and Cumulative Effect of Change in 
Accounting Principle
Income taxes (benefits)

Loss before Equity Income and Cumulative 
Effect of Change in Accounting Principle
Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates
Equity in net income of consolidated affiliates

(Loss) Income before Cumulative Effect of 

Change in Accounting Principle
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle

Net (Loss) Income

$3,765
4,783
248
386

9,182

2,429
2,716
(60)
344
930
2,664
329
26
(4)
(62)

9,312

(130)
(129)

(1)
(7)
(84)

(92)
(2)

$    (94)

Condensed Consolidating Statements of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended December 31, 2001 

$ 73
59
–
8

140

65
65
–
8
–
41
–
–
–
(12)

167

(27)
9

(36)
10
–

(26)
–

$(26)

Parent

$3,605
3,594
881
1,083

9,163

2,829
2,120
517
921
80
2,023
386
(799)
–
582

8,659

504
600

(96)
46
–

(50)
(3)

$

–
–
–
(1,477)

(1,477)

(153)
(21)
–
(1,273)
(13)
–
–
–
–
2

(1,458)

(19)
(7)

(12)
4
84

76
3

79

$    (53)

$

Company Subsidiaries

Guarantor Non-Guarantor
Subsidiaries

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities
Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

Increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

$ 3,643
(1,585)
(641)
–

1,417
997

$ 2,414

$ 4
(1)
(3)
–

–
–

$  –

$(1,893)
2,271
455
(10)

823
753

$ 1,576

90

$  7,443
8,436
1,129
–

17,008

5,170
4,880
457
–
997
4,728
715
(773)
(4)
510

16,680

328
473

(145)
53
–

(92)
(2)

$      (94)

Total
Company

$1,754
685
(189)
(10)

2,240
1,750

$3,990

Report of Management

Our management is responsible for the integrity and
objectivity of all information presented in this annual
report. The Consolidated Financial Statements were
prepared in conformity with accounting principles
generally accepted in the United States of America
and include amounts based on management’s best
estimates and judgments.

We maintain an internal control structure designed

to provide reasonable assurance that assets are safe-
guarded against loss or unauthorized use and that
financial records are adequate and can be relied upon
to produce accurate and complete financial state-
ments. This structure includes the hiring and training
of qualified people, written accounting and control
policies and procedures, clearly drawn lines of
accountability and delegations of authority. In a busi-
ness ethics policy that is continuously communicated
to all employees, we have established our intent to
adhere to the highest standards of ethical conduct in
all of our business activities.

We monitor our internal control structure with
direct management reviews and a comprehensive
program of internal audits. In addition,
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, our independent audi-
tors, have audited the 2003, 2002 and 2001
Consolidated Financial Statements in accordance with
auditing standards generally accepted in the United
States of America and considered the internal controls
over financial reporting to determine their audit proce-
dures for the purpose of expressing an opinion on our
Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Audit Committee of the Board of Directors,
which is composed solely of independent directors,
meets regularly with the independent auditors, the
internal auditors and representatives of management
to review audits, financial reporting and internal con-
trol matters, as well as the nature and extent of the
audit effort. The Audit Committee is responsible for
the engagement of the independent auditors. The
independent auditors and internal auditors have free
access to the Audit Committee.

Report of Independent
Auditors

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Xerox
Corporation:

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated bal-
ance sheets and the related consolidated statements 
of income, cash flows and common shareholders’
equity present fairly, in all material respects, the finan-
cial position of Xerox Corporation and its subsidiaries
at December 31, 2003 and 2002, and the results of their
operations and their cash flows for each of the three
years in the period ended December 31, 2003 in con-
formity with accounting principles generally accepted
in the United States of America. These financial 
statements are the responsibility of the Company’s
management; our responsibility is to express an 
opinion on these financial statements based on our
audits. We conducted our audits of these statements in
accordance with auditing standards generally accepted
in the United States of America, which require that we
plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assur-
ance about whether the financial statements are free of
material misstatement. An audit includes examining,
on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and
disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the
accounting principles used and significant estimates
made by management, and evaluating the overall
financial statement presentation. We believe that our
audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
As discussed in Note 1, in 2003 the Company
adopted the provisions of the Financial Accounting
Standards Board Interpretation No. 46R,
“Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an
Interpretation of ARB 51,” which changed certain con-
solidation policies. Additionally, as discussed in Note
1, the Company adopted the provisions of Statement
of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142, “Goodwill
and Other Intangible Assets” on January 1, 2002.

Anne M. Mulcahy
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Stamford, Connecticut
January 27, 2004

Lawrence A. Zimmerman
Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

Gary R. Kabureck
Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer

91

Quarterly Results of Operations
(Unaudited) 

In millions, except per-share data

2003(1)
Revenues
Costs and Expenses(2)

(Loss) Income before Income Taxes (Benefits) 

and Equity Income
Income taxes (benefits)
Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates

Net (Loss) Income

Basic (Loss) Earnings per Share(3)

Diluted (Loss) Earnings per Share(3)

2002(1)
Revenues
Costs and Expenses(4)

(Loss) Income before Income Taxes (Benefits), 

Equity Income and Cumulative Effect of Change 
in Accounting Principle

Income taxes (benefits)
Equity in net income of unconsolidated affiliates

(Loss) Income before Cumulative Effect of Change 

in Accounting Principle

Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle

First
Quarter

Second
Quarter

Third
Quarter

Fourth
Quarter

$3,757
3,903

(146)
(67)
14

$    (65)

$ (0.10)

$ (0.10)

$3,858
3,958

(100)
(38)
11

(51)
(63)

$3,920
3,810

110
40
16

$     86

$  0.10

$  0.09

$3,952
3,830

122
50
15

87
–

$3,732
3,590

142
38
13

$   117

$  0.12

$  0.11

$3,793
3,647

146
64
17

99
–

$4,292
3,962

330
123
15

$   222

$  0.25

$  0.22

$4,246
4,310

(64)
(72)
11

19
–

Full
Year

$15,701
15,265

436
134
58

$     360

$    0.38

$    0.36

$15,849
15,745

104
4
54

154
(63)

Net (Loss) Income

$  (114)

$     87

$     99

$     19

$       91

Basic (Loss) Earnings per share before 

Cumulative Effect of Change in Accounting Principle

Basic (Loss) Earnings per Share(3)

Diluted (Loss) Earnings per Share before 

Cumulative Effect of Change in Accounting Principle

Diluted (Loss) Earnings per Share(3)

$ (0.07)

$ (0.16)

$ (0.07)

$ (0.16)

$  0.12

$  0.12

$  0.11

$  0.11

$  0.05

$  0.05

$  0.04

$  0.04

$  0.01

$  0.01

$  0.01

$  0.01

$    0.11

$    0.02

$    0.10

$    0.02

(1) The quarterly results of operations presented herein have been modified to reflect the adoption of FIN 46R (as described in Note 1 to the Consolidated

Financial Statements). As such, certain amounts herein are different from those originally reported in our Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q as filed with the
SEC. There was no effect on net income (loss) or earnings per share in any period, however.

(2) Costs and expenses include restructuring and asset impairment charges of $8, $37, $11 and $120 for the first, second, third and fourth quarters of 2003, 

respectively. Cost and expenses include a provision for litigation of $300 and $(61) in the first quarter and fourth quarter of 2003, respectively.

(3) The sum of quarterly (loss) earnings per share may differ from the full-year amounts due to rounding, or in the case of diluted earnings per share, because

securities that are anti-dilutive in certain quarters may not be anti-dilutive on a full-year basis.

(4) Costs and expenses included restructuring and asset impairment charges of $146, $53, $63 and $408 for the first, second, third and fourth quarters of 2002,

respectively.

92

Five Years in Review

(Dollars in millions, except per-share data)

2003

2002

2001(2)

2000

1999

Per-Share Data(1)
Earnings (Loss)

Basic
Diluted

Common stock dividends
Operations
Revenues
Sales
Service, outsourcing, and rentals
Finance Income

Research and development expenses
Selling, administrative and general expenses
Net income (loss)(1)

Financial Position
Cash and cash equivalents
Accounts and finance receivables, net
Inventories
Equipment on operating leases, net
Land, buildings and equipment, net
Investment in discontinued operations

Total assets

Consolidated capitalization
Short-term debt and current portion of long-term debt
Long-term debt

Total debt

Minorities’ interests in equity of subsidiaries
Obligation for equity put options
Liabilities to subsidiary trusts issuing preferred securities
Series B convertible preferred stock
Series C mandatory convertible preferred stock
Common shareholders’ equity

$

0.38
0.36
–

$15,701
6,970
7,734
997
868
4,249
360

$ 2,477
10,972
1,152
364
1,827
449
24,591

4,236
6,930

11,166
102
–
1,809
499
889
3,291

$ 0.02
0.02
–

$15,849
6,752
8,097
1,000
917
4,437
91

$ 2,887
11,077
1,231
450
1,757
728
25,550

4,377
9,794

14,171
73
–
1,793
508
–
1,893

$ (0.15)
(0.15)
0.05

$17,008
7,443
8,436
1,129
997
4,728
(94)

$ 3,990
11,574
1,364
804
1,999
749
27,746

6,637
10,107

16,744
73
–
1,787
470
–
1,797

$ (0.48)
(0.48)
0.65

$ 18,751
8,839
8,750
1,162
1,064
5,518
(273)

$ 1,750
13,067
1,983
1,266
2,527
534
28,291

3,080
15,557

18,637
87
32
721
426
–
1,801

$    1.20
1.17
0.80

$18,995
8,967
8,853
1,175
1,020
5,204
844

$     132
13,487
2,344
1,423
2,458
1,130
27,841

4,626
11,521

16,147
75
–
719
370
–
2,953

Total capitalization

$ 17,756

$18,438

$20,871

$ 21,704

$20,264

Selected Data and Ratios
Common shareholders of record at year-end
Book value per common share
Year-end common stock market price
Employees at year-end
Gross margin

Sales gross margin
Service, outsourcing, and rentals gross margin
Finance gross margin

Working capital
Current ratio
Cost of additions to land, buildings and equipment
Depreciation on buildings and equipment

56,326
$
4.15
$ 13.80
61,100

42.0%
36.4%
44.3%
63.7%

$ 2,766
1.4
197
299

$
$

57,300
$ 2.56
$ 8.05
67,800

42.4%
37.3%
44.5%
59.9%

$ 3,242
1.4
146
341

$
$

59,830
$ 2.49
$ 10.42
78,900

38.2%
30.5%
42.2%
59.5%

$ 2,340
1.2
219
402

$
$

59,879
$    2.68
4.63
$
91,500

37.4%
31.2%
41.1%
57.1%

$ 4,928
1.8
452
417

$
$

55,766
$ 4.42
$ 22.69
93,600

42.3%
37.2%
44.7%
63.0%

$ 2,965
1.3
$
594
$  416

(1) Net income (loss), as well as Basic and Diluted Earnings per Share for the years ended December 31, 2003 and 2002 exclude the effect of amortization of good-

will in accordance with the adoption of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142 “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets.” For additional information
regarding the adoption of this standard and its effects on Income from continuing operations, Net income (loss) and Earnings (Loss) per share, refer to Note 1 to
the Consolidated Financial Statements under the heading “ New Accounting Standards and Accounting Changes – Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets.”

(2) In March 2001, we sold half of our ownership interest in Fuji Xerox to Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd. for $1.3 billion in cash. In connection with the sale, we recorded a
pre-tax gain of $773. As a result, our ownership percentage decreased from 50 percent to 25 percent. Refer to Note 3 to the Consolidated Financial Statements
under the caption “Fuji Xerox Interest” for further information.

93

Officers

Anne M. Mulcahy
Chairman and Chief Executive
Officer

Ursula M. Burns
Senior Vice President
President, Business Group
Operations

Thomas J. Dolan
Senior Vice President
President, Xerox Global Services 

James A. Firestone
Senior Vice President
President, Corporate 
Operations Group

Hervé J. Gallaire
Senior Vice President 
President, Xerox Innovation Group
and Chief Technology Officer

Gilbert J. Hatch
Senior Vice President
President, Production Systems
Group
Business Group Operations

Michael C. Mac Donald
Senior Vice President
President, North American
Solutions Group

Jean-Noel Machon
Senior Vice President
President, Developing Markets
Operations

Hector J. Motroni
Senior Vice President, Chief Staff
Officer and Chief Ethics Officer

Brian E. Stern
Senior Vice President
President, Xerox Supplies 
Business Group
Business Group Operations

Lawrence A. Zimmerman
Senior Vice President and Chief
Financial Officer

Wim T. Appelo
Vice President 
Worldwide Manufacturing 
and Supply Chain
Business Group Operations

94

Harry R. Beeth
Vice President and Controller

Guilherme M.N. Bettencourt
Vice President
Chairman, Xerox Comercio e
Indústria (Brazil)
Developing Markets Operations

Michael D. Brannigan
Vice President
Senior Vice President, 
Sales Operations
North American Solutions Group

Richard F. Cerrone
Vice President
Senior Vice President and General
Manager, Office Europe
Xerox Europe

Christina E. Clayton
Vice President and General Counsel

Patricia A. Cusick
Vice President and Chief
Information Officer
Corporate Operations Group

J. Michael Farren
Vice President
External and Legal Affairs

Anthony M. Federico
Vice President
Platform Development, 
Production Systems Group
Business Group Operations

Emerson U. Fullwood
Vice President
President, Xerox Channels Group
Business Group Operations

John E. McDermott
Vice President
Corporate Strategy and Alliances
Corporate Operations Group

Diane E. McGarry
Vice President
Chief Marketing Officer, Corporate
Marketing and Communications
Corporate Operations Group

Patricia M. Nazemetz
Vice President 
Human Resources

Russell Y. Okasako
Vice President 
Taxes

Rhonda L. Seegal
Vice President and Treasurer 

Frank D. Steenburgh
Vice President
Senior Vice President, 
Business Growth
Production Systems Group
Business Group Operations

Leslie F. Varon
Vice President 
Investor Relations and Corporate
Secretary

Tim Williams
Vice President
President, Xerox Office Business
Group
Business Group Operations

Armando Zagalo de Lima
Vice President
President, Xerox Europe

Gary R. Kabureck
Vice President and Chief
Accounting Officer

Lance H. Davis
Assistant Treasurer and Director,
Global Risk Management

James H. Lesko
Vice President
President, e-Business and TeleWeb
Corporate Operations Group

Rafik O. Loutfy
Vice President 
Centre Manager, Xerox Research
Centre of Canada
Xerox Innovation Group

1  Member of the Audit Committee
2  Member of the Compensation 

Committee

3  Member of the Corporate 
Governance Committee
4  Member of the Finance 

Committee

N. J. Nicholas, Jr. 1, 3, 4
Investor
New York, New York

John E. Pepper 1, 2
Vice President Finance and
Administration
Yale University
New Haven, Connecticut
Retired Chairman and Chief
Executive Officer 
The Procter & Gamble Company
Cincinnati, Ohio

Ann N. Reese 4
Executive Director
Center for Adoption Policy Studies
Rye, New York

Stephen Robert 4
Chancellor, Brown University
Chairman
Robert Capital Management LLC
New York, New York

Directors

Glenn A. Britt
Chairman and Chief Executive
Officer
Time Warner Cable
Stamford, Connecticut

Richard J. Harrington 1
President and Chief Executive
Officer
The Thomson Corporation
Stamford, Connecticut

William Curt Hunter 1
Dean and Distinguished Professor
of Finance
University Of Connecticut School of
Business
Storrs, Connecticut

Antonia Ax:son Johnson 1, 2
Chairman
Axel Johnson Group
Stockholm, Sweden

Vernon E. Jordan, Jr. 3, 4
Senior Managing Director
Lazard Freres & Co., LLC
New York, New York 
Of Counsel
Akin, Gump, Strauss, 
Hauer & Feld, LLP
Attorneys-at-Law, Washington, DC

Yotaro Kobayashi
Chairman of the Board 
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Tokyo, Japan

Hilmar Kopper 1, 4
Former Chairman and Chief
Executive Officer
Deutsche Bank AG
Frankfurt, Germany

Ralph S. Larsen 2, 3
Former Chairman and Chief
Executive Officer 
Johnson & Johnson
New Brunswick, New Jersey

Anne M. Mulcahy
Chairman and Chief Executive
Officer
Xerox Corporation
Stamford, Connecticut

95

Social Responsibility

From environmental and diversity programs to 
community outreach and corporate governance,
Xerox continues to be recognized as a leader in all
aspects of corporate social responsibility. We believe
that it is good for our people, good for our business,
good for our communities and ultimately good for 
our shareholders. 

Community Investments

The Xerox Foundation contributed $11 million in 2003
to about 400 non-profit organizations. Among them:
• More than 40 grants to university science programs.
Each grant is championed by a Xerox scientist ensur-
ing that our research community stays abreast of the
most recent scientific developments in academia.
• Scholarship programs at more than 140 colleges
and universities. Our investments are targeted to
such areas as minorities and women in engineering
and business education in historically black colleges
and universities. These programs help Xerox attract
the best young talent.

•  Grants to United Ways around the country that

exceeded  $2.3 million. Xerox people donated another
$1.7 million of their own, making the total Xerox 
commitment to United Way more than $4 million.

Corporate Governance

Xerox continues to work diligently to uphold one of
our core values: We behave responsibly as a good 
corporate citizen. Some examples:
• With the recent election of five new directors, Xerox’s

13-member board is 85 percent independent.
• A new Code of Conduct has been implemented 
and all employees worldwide have been trained.
• Our Ethics Helpline has been strengthened so that
all employees can seek guidance and raise issues.
• And we are working hard to ensure we maintain a

culture of integrity, openness and inclusion.

Environment, Health, Safety

Xerox’s environmental programs demonstrate that
strong values aligned with sensible business practices
are not only possible but also synergistic. Our goal is
to make waste-free products in waste-free factories to
help our customers attain waste-free workplaces. In
the previous year, we:
• Diverted 161 million pounds of waste from landfills
and saved Xerox several hundred million dollars
through remanufacturing and parts reuse. 

• Enabled energy savings of 1.5 million megawatt
hours through reuse of parts and the sale of 
ENERGY STAR® products. 

96

A
D
E
E
R
F
D
R
A
H
C
R

I

Xerox encourages a spirit of corporate citizenship
through programs like Social Service Leave, which
enables a select group of employees to take up to a
year-long sabbatical at full pay to work with a non-
profit organization, and our Community Involvement
Program, which encourages Xerox people to volunteer
in their communities. Pictured here: Xerox employee
Steven Mueller is on Social Service Leave to work
with at-risk children in an animal-assisted therapy 
program at Green Chimneys Children’s Services, a
social service agency in Brewster, N.Y.

• Deployed a stringent set of requirements to our

paper suppliers to ensure Xerox paper is sourced
from sustainably managed forests.

• Examined and, where possible, modified manufac-

turing processes to cut air emissions, non-hazardous
and hazardous waste, and water and energy use. 
For instance, non-hazardous waste recycling rose to
92 percent in 2002.

Diversity

Xerox views diversity in the workplace as both a moral
imperative and a competitive advantage. Last year, we:
• Continued to build an inclusive workforce, an ongoing
initiative at Xerox for more than 30 years. At year’s
end, about 33 percent of the company’s general 
U.S. work force were women; about 30 percent 
were minorities. 

• Supported diversity through a wide range of 

programs including work/life benefits, employee
caucus groups, youth scholarship programs and
supplier diversity initiatives. 

• Continued to invest in our supplier diversity 

program. Since it began, Xerox has spent over 
$4.4 billion with minority-, women- and veteran-
owned businesses in the United States. 

• Gained a plethora of diversity awards, including
recognition from Fortune, DiversityInc magazine,
Hispanic magazine, Asian Enterprise magazine, 
the National Association of Female Executives 
and the Human Rights Campaign.

 
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
2-17-22 Akasaka
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107
Japan
81 3 3585-3211

How to Reach Us

Xerox Corporation
800 Long Ridge Road
P.O. Box 1600
Stamford, CT 06904
203 968-3000

Xerox Europe
Riverview
Oxford Road
Uxbridge
Middlesex
United Kingdom
UB8 1HS
44 1895 251133

Products and Service

www.xerox.com or by phone: 

• 800 ASK-XEROX (800 275-9376) for sales

• 800 822-2979 for equipment service

• 877 362-6567 for customer relations

Additional Information

The Xerox Foundation and Community
Involvement Program: 203 968-3333

Diversity programs and 
EEO-1 reports: 585 423-6157
www.xerox.com/diversity

Minority and Women Owned Business 
Suppliers: 585 422-2295
www.xerox.com/supplierdiversity 

Ethics Helpline: 866 XRX-0001
email: ethics@usa.xerox.com

Environment, Health and Safety 
Progress Report: 800 828-6571 prompts 1, 3
www.xerox.com/ehs/progressreport

Governance:
www.xerox.com/investor (Corporate Governance)

Questions from Students and Educators:
email: Nancy.Dempsey@usa.xerox.com

Xerox Innovation:
www.xerox.com/innovation

Independent Auditors
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
300 Atlantic Street
Stamford, CT 06901
203 539-3000

Shareholder Information  

For Investor Information, including comprehensive 
earnings releases: www.xerox.com/investor

Earnings releases also available by mail: 
800 828-6396.

For shareholder services, call 800 828-6396 
(TDD: 800 368-0328) or 781 575-3222, or write to 
EquiServe Trust Company, N.A., P.O. Box 43010,
Providence, RI 02940-3010 
or use email available at www.equiserve.com.

Annual Meeting

Thursday, May 20, 2004

Park Hyatt Philadelphia at the Bellevue
Broad and Walnut Streets
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
10:00 a.m. EDT
Proxy material mailed by April 2, 2004,
to shareholders of record March 23, 2004.

Investment professionals may contact:
Cindy Johnston, Director, Investor Relations
Cindy.Johnston@usa.xerox.com 

Darlene Caldarelli, Manager, Investor Relations
Darlene.Caldarelli@usa.xerox.com

Xerox Common Stock Prices and Dividends

New York Stock Exchange composite prices

First
2003  Quarter

High 

Low 

$9.45

8.05

First
2002  Quarter

High 

$11.45

Low 

9.10

Second
Quarter

$11.57

8.66

Second
Quarter

$11.08

6.97

Third
Quarter

$11.49

9.54

Third
Quarter

$7.12

4.95

Fourth
Quarter

$13.80

10.17

Fourth
Quarter

$8.85

4.30

At its July 9, 2001 meeting, the Company’s Board of Directors
eliminated the dividend on the common stock.

Stock Listed and Traded

Xerox common stock (XRX) is listed on the New York Stock
Exchange and the Chicago Stock Exchange. It is also traded
on the Boston, Cincinnati, Pacific Coast, Philadelphia, London
and Switzerland exchanges.

Thank you to our customers, and their customers, 
who participated in this report: ConAgra Foods, Inc.,
Global Document Solutions, Parsons School of 
Design, McGraw-Hill Construction, Regency Financial
Services, and Siemens AG. 

All of us at Xerox deeply appreciate our relationships
and look forward to making them even stronger.

© 2004 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. XEROX®, CentreWare®,
CopyCentre®, DocuShare®, DocuTech®, FlowPort®, FreeFlow, iGen3®, 
New Business of Printing, Phaser®, and WorkCentre® are trademarks of
Xerox Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. DocuColor® is used
under license.

Design: Arnold Saks Associates
CEO portrait: David Burnett, Contact Press Images     

Xerox Corporation
800 Long Ridge Road
PO Box 1600
Stamford, CT 06904

www.xerox.com

2980-AR-03